JP5500783B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, includes a variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each based on the establishment of a start condition. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a variable display result becomes a predetermined specific display result.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “variation”) when the game medium wins in the winning area (start condition is established) is provided. Some are configured to be able to be controlled to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the result is a specific display result (big hit symbol). As an example, in a specific gaming state, a special electric combination called a big prize opening or an attacker is opened, and a state where a winning of a game ball is extremely easy (round game) is provided as being continuously executable for a certain period of time. After the end of the specific gaming state, there is a case where the special gaming state that is likely to become the specific gaming state again is controlled until the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined upper limit number.

  In the variable display device, a symbol other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) continues for a predetermined period of time in a state that matches the specific display result (stop, swing, Before the final stop symbol is displayed due to the fact that it is displayed while being scaled or deformed, etc., or because the same symbol fluctuates synchronously or the position of the display symbol changes. There may be a reach state in which the possibility of the variable display result being a “big hit” continues. In the reach state, a sense of expectation that the variable display result will be “big hit” is increased by executing a reach effect different from the period other than the reach state.

And it has been proposed that the probability of reaching a reach state varies depending on whether the operating state of the gaming machine is a low operating state or a stable operating state (for example, Patent Document 1). In addition, the high reach state lottery is executed separately from the big hit lottery. When the high reach state lottery is won, the high reach state in which the appearance rate of the super reach having a high expectation that the variable display result is “big hit” is increased. It is proposed to determine the remaining number of fluctuations in the high reach state corresponding to the winning value in the high reach state lottery (for example, Patent Document 2).
JP 2004-73530 A JP 2003-144669 A

  When the technique described in Patent Document 1 is applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a special gaming state up to a predetermined upper limit number of times as described above, the gaming machine is operated within the period controlled to the special gaming state. If the state does not change, the probability of reaching the reach state does not change. In addition, when the technology described in Patent Document 2 is applied to such a gaming machine, the high reach state lottery is executed when the normal state is not controlled to the special gaming state. The appearance rate of various reach cannot be changed in the special game state.

  This invention is made in view of the said actual condition, and it aims at providing the game machine which improves the interest of a game by changing the appearance rate of the reach state, etc. in a special game state.

In order to achieve the above-described object, the gaming machine according to the claims of the present application starts the condition (for example, after No is determined in Step S202 following the determination of Yes in Step S201 or following the determination of Yes in Step S210). If it is determined No in step S211 and then No is determined in step S241), a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols) that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed. Variable display units (for example, “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc. in the image display device 5), and the identification information variable display result is specified in advance. A specific gaming state (for example, a big hit state) advantageous to the player when a display result (for example, a final stop symbol of the big hit combination) is obtained Predetermining means (for example, a game) to be controlled (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that determines whether to control to the specific gaming state before the variable display result of the identification information is derived and displayed The CPU 103 of the control microcomputer 100 executes the processing of step S250) and after the specific gaming state is finished, the identification information is more specific than the normal gaming state until the variable display count of the identification information reaches a predetermined number. Special game state control means (for example, after the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S313 to S318 after the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S313 to S318) for controlling to a special gaming state (for example, a probable change state or a short time state) that is likely to become a gaming state Until it is determined Yes in step S291, the process of step S250 and step S141 are performed. Whether or not to change the variable information display state of the identification information to the reach state based on the decision to not control to the specific gaming state by the pre-determining means) Reach determination means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S269 to S271) and a predetermined condition based on the variable display count of the identification information in the special gaming state are determined. Reach determination data used for determination by the reach determination unit according to a determination result by the predetermined condition determination unit (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S261 and S262) and the determination result by the predetermined condition determination unit, Multiple types of reach determination data (for example, reach determination Table data constituting the tables 134A to 134E) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S267), and the predetermining means in the special gaming state Whether to control to the specific gaming state is determined at a common rate regardless of the number of variable display times of the identification information.

Note that, based on the determination result by the prior determination unit and the determination result by the reach determination unit, the variation pattern type determination unit (for example, the CPU 103 performs a step of determining the variation pattern type of the identification information from a plurality of types of variation pattern types). After executing any one of the processes of S264, S266, S272, and S273, the part that executes the processes of steps S274 and S275) and the variation pattern included in the variation pattern type determined by the variation pattern type determination unit The variation pattern determining means for determining the variation pattern of the identification information from among them (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S276 to S278) and the determination result of the variation pattern determining means during the variable display of the identification information. Production execution means for executing the corresponding production operation (example: Field effect control CPU120 and portions for performing the effect control process process in step S406) and may be provided.
Further, the reach determination data selection means has a higher determination ratio that the reach state is set when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied than when it is determined that the predetermined condition is not satisfied. The reach determination data set to be selected is selected (for example, in the process of step S267, the reach determination tables 134A to 134E shown in FIGS. 13A to 13E are set according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 13F). 134E to select any one of them.

  Alternatively, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the reach determination data selection unit has a lower determination ratio indicating the reach state than when it is determined that the predetermined condition is not satisfied. The reach determination data set so as to be selected (for example, in the process of step S267, according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 13F, the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. ), A reach determination table 134C illustrated in FIG. 70A, a reach determination table 134D illustrated in FIG. 13D, and a reach determination table 134E illustrated in FIG. 70B. Such).

Further, an effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect and a specific reach effect determining means (for example, CPU 103) for determining whether or not to execute a specific reach effect at a different determination ratio depending on the determination result by the predetermined condition determining means. In step S264, according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 11C, the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C shown in FIGS. 11A to 11C and FIGS. 12A and 12B are shown. Reach fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 14A to 14E after selecting one of the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination tables 132D and 132E shown or according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 14F in step S272. After selecting any of the type determination tables 135A to 135E, it is a part for executing the processes of steps S274 and S275. ) And it may be provided.

Further, an effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect and a specific effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect different from the reach effect at a different determination ratio according to the determination result by the predetermined condition determining means. (For example, after the CPU 103 selects one of the hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 in step S276, or after the selection of the loss fluctuation pattern determination tables 138A and 139B shown in FIGS. 18 and 19). after selecting one, such as portions for performing the processing of steps S277 and S278) and may be provided.

  Further, the effect executing means changes the effect operation related to the variable display of the identification information according to the determination result by the predetermined condition determining means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in FIG. 41A in step S520). After determining the effect control pattern stored in any of the effect control pattern tables 185A and 185B shown in FIG.

  The present invention has the following effects.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is established based on the variable display count of the identification information in the special gaming state, and a determination is made that the reach state is set according to the determination result. A plurality of types of reach determination data having different ratios are selected. In this way, by changing the appearance rate of the reach state depending on whether or not the predetermined condition based on the variable display count in the special game state is satisfied, a change in the sense of expectation resulting in the specific display result in the special game state occurs. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Based on the determination results by the pre-decision unit and the reach determination unit, the variation pattern type of the identification information is determined as one of a plurality of types, and the variation of the identification information from among the variation patterns included in the determined variation pattern type if so pattern is determined, it changes the variation pattern type or variation pattern, which makes it easier to add during the random distribution setting, relaxing the restriction in setting the incidence of the effect operation corresponding to the change pattern Can do.

  In the gaming machine according to the second aspect, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination ratio of the reach state is higher than when it is determined that the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Thus, by increasing the appearance rate of the reach state when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the special game state, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation as a specific display result and improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine according to the third aspect, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination ratio of the reach state is lower than when it is determined that the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Thereby, if the reach condition is established when the predetermined condition is established in the special game state, the expectation that is the specific display result is enhanced, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect, it is determined whether or not to execute the specific reach effect at a different determination ratio according to the determination result of whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this way, by changing the rate at which a specific reach effect is executed in the special game state, it is possible to change the expectation resulting in the specific display result in the special game state, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

  In the gaming machine according to the fifth aspect, whether or not to execute a specific effect different from the reach effect is determined at a different determination ratio according to a determination result of whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this way, by changing the rate at which a specific effect is executed in the special game state, it is possible to change the sense of expectation resulting in the specific display result in the special game state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine according to the sixth aspect, the effect operation related to the variable display of the identification information is changed according to the determination result of whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Thus, by changing the production operation in the special game state, it is possible to change the expectation as a specific display result in the special game state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). A special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed is variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are formed, for example, in a square shape. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, a number indicating “0” to “9” and a symbol indicating “−”), and the type may be different. May be different. Further, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, “00” to “99”. .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a variable display section divided into a plurality of parts such as three, decorative symbols which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) each identifiable are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In response to the start of either the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol change by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special game, ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas are movable within the display area of the image display device 5 so that the decorative symbols can be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner. May be. As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified are displayed in a variable manner, and a finalized decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed.

  In the image display device 5, as the display areas to be the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, three areas may be provided so that they can be bonded or separated, or can be bonded and separated. . The display operation in the image display device 5 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. When the first special symbol display device 4A is executing variable display of the first special diagram, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to perform effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special figure is executed on the display device 4B, the effect display is executed on the image display device 5 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese Numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. For example, it may be a decoration image showing a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  During the change of the decorative symbol, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol number, sequentially from the top to the bottom. When the scrolling display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the holding of the variable display occurs when a game ball enters (starts winning) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B. To do. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  As an example, the start winning storage display area 5H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Yes. When the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the One of the display parts that are displayed (transparent color) (for example, the leftmost display part among the non-displayed display parts) is changed to blue display. Further, when a special ball game start condition (second start condition) using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established based on the game ball entering the second start winning opening, it is normally not One of the displayed display parts is changed to a red display. Thereafter, when one of the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure and the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, for example, The display at the leftmost display part is removed and the display at each display part is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part whose display color has changed) returns to non-display. Here, when the hold memory display is performed, the special figure hold memory number based on the establishment of the variable display game start condition can be specified, but the start condition is the first start condition or the second start condition. If it cannot be specified, the display mode of the special figure reserved memory number may be changed to a predetermined display form, for example, by changing the number of display parts corresponding to the special figure reserved memory number to gray.

  In the start winning memory display area 5H, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. In addition to the start winning memory display area 5H or in place of the start winning memory display area 5H, a display for displaying the number of special figure reserved memories may be provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A so as to be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. It is comprised including.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening. Normally open. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball enters the second start winning opening by tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state. Easy to open and open. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If so, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and changes into an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Forming a mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the off state, the special prize opening door closes the special prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big prize opening door opens the big winning opening. A game ball that has entered a special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Thus, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special game started first is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. Due to this, when the start condition for starting the special figure game is not satisfied, the variable display is suspended. For example, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied when the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold memory The number is incremented by 1 (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied when the second start condition is satisfied, the second holding memory is stored. The number is incremented by 1 and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. When this is done, the second reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented). In this embodiment, the added value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. A plurality of types of normal symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9” or the symbols indicating “−” as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately illuminating decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, one or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. For example, an operation button 30 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate. For example, the operation button 30 may be configured by combining a push switch that can be pressed and a rotatable jog dial. The operation button 30 is not limited to a button that can be pressed or rotated, and may be a button that can be touched or pressed, such as a touch panel, or tilted like a lever-type switch. Operation may be possible. Further, instead of the operation button 30, a sensor that can detect a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. In other words, the operation button 30 only needs to be configured so that a predetermined operation action by the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. The player's operation action performed on the operation button 30 is detected by the operation detection switch 31 shown in FIG.

  In the normal game with the normal symbol display 20, the normal symbol display 20 shows that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the general chart start condition for executing variable display is established, based on the fact that the general chart start condition for starting variable display of normal symbols, such as the end of the previous general chart game, is established, Be started. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  The special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is caused by the fact that the game ball that has entered the first starting winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is satisfied, the process is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game, the big hit gaming state, or the small hit gaming state. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a game ball that has entered the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is established, the second start condition is started based on the fact that the second special condition game, the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state has ended, or the like.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, when a predetermined time (special symbol fluctuation time) has elapsed, the variable symbol variable display result The fixed special symbol that becomes is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result, and it becomes “lost” if a special symbol other than the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round game advantageous to the player (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed a predetermined number of times. . Further, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit game state different from the big hit game state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, numbers indicating “1”, “3”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, numbers indicating “5” are jackpot symbols, and “−” is indicated. The symbol is a lost pattern. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lose symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are 15 round jackpot symbols, A special symbol indicating the number “1” is a two-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as a multi-round specific gaming state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. A round is performed that changes to a first state that is advantageous to the user. In this way, the open / close plate that opened the grand prize opening during the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closed the grand prize opening to play the special variable prize ball device 7 as a game. Change to the second state, which is disadvantageous to the person, and finish one round. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round, which is the opening cycle of the big prize opening, becomes the first round number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15 round big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game. In such a 15 round big hit state, a predetermined number of balls (for example, 15 balls) are obtained each time a game ball wins a big winning opening.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as a small round specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played in each round. The period for changing to the first state that is advantageous to the player (the period in which the big prize opening is opened by the opening / closing plate) is a second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state. . In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round becomes a second round number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first round number in the 15 round big hit state. Note that in the 2 round big hit state, it is only necessary to control the number of executions of the round to be the second round number, and other control may be performed in the same manner as the 15 round big hit state. A game in the round two big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the two-round big hit state, in a predetermined winning ball apparatus provided separately from the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in each round, by changing a predetermined winning opening serving as a big winning opening from a closed state to an open state, etc. The state may be changed from the second state that is disadvantageous to the player to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and then returned to the second state after a predetermined period (the first period or the second period) has elapsed. In such a two-round big hit state, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are obtained if a game ball wins a big winning opening, but the opening period of the big winning opening is the second period (0.5 seconds). And it is very short. Therefore, the two-round big hit state is a big hit gaming state in which a game is not substantially obtained. In addition, the big hit gaming state as the low round specific gaming state is not limited to the number of round execution times compared to the big hit gaming state as the multiple round specific gaming state. For example, the round execution number is small round specific gaming state. While the state and the multi-round specific gaming state are the same, in the small-round specific gaming state, the upper limit period (for example, 2 seconds) for opening the big prize opening is the upper limit period for the multi-round specific gaming state (for example, 29 seconds) ) May be shorter. That is, the big hit gaming state as the small round specific gaming state is that the period in which the big prize opening is changed to the open state in each round is a second period shorter than the first period in the multi-round specific gaming state, The number of executions may be at least one of the second round numbers less than the first round number in the multi-round specific gaming state.

  Out of the special symbols that indicate the numbers of “3” and “7” that will be the 15-round jackpot symbol, the special symbol that indicates the number of “3” is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special-game game. After the state is over, as one of the special game states, the time is controlled to be a short time state in which the special symbol change time (special figure change time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state. Here, the normal state is a normal gaming state as a gaming state different from a specific gaming state such as a big hit gaming state, a probability variation state, and a short-time state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a system reset is performed). As in the case where the initialization process is performed after the power is turned on, the same control is performed. In this embodiment, one of the conditions is satisfied first, that is, a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in a short time state and the variable display result is “big hit”. Sometimes the short-time state ends. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15 round jackpot symbol that is controlled to the short-time state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is usually a big bonus It is called a symbol (also called “non-probable big hit symbol”). Further, the fact that the 15-round non-probable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed and the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as “15R normal big hit” (also referred to as “15R non-probable big hit”).

  Out of the special symbols that indicate the numbers of “3” and “7” that will be the big hit symbol of 15 rounds, the special symbol that shows the number of “7” is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. After the status is over, or after the 2 round jackpot state has ended based on the special symbol showing the number “1” that will be the 2 round jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game, As one of the special game states different from the normal game state, for example, the special figure variation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability variation state (high probability state) in which probability variation control (probability variation control) is continuously performed is controlled. The In this probabilistic state, the variable display result of each special figure game and decorative design is improved so that the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” and further controlled to the big hit gaming state will be higher than in the normal state and the short-time state. To do. In this embodiment, one of the conditions is satisfied first, that is, a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) in the probability variation state and the variable display result is “big hit”. Sometimes the probability variation state ends. Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15 round jackpot symbol that is controlled to be probable after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is It is called a symbol. Like the special symbol indicating the number “1”, the two-round big hit symbol controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is a sudden big hit symbol. It is called. Further, the fact that the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed and the variable display result is “big hit” is called “15R probability big hit”. The fact that the sudden hit symbol is stopped and displayed and the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as “surprise big hit” (also referred to as “2R probability variable big hit”). The 15 round jackpot symbols “3” and “7” and the 2 round jackpot symbol “1” are examples, and each jackpot symbol is not limited to these. For example, in order to prevent the player from recognizing the jackpot symbol or the type of jackpot, the jackpot symbol may not be a number but may be a predetermined symbol (for example, “co”).

  After the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit game state different from the big hit game state is controlled. In this small hit gaming state, a variable winning operation for changing the special variable winning device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is performed as in the two round big hit state. That is, in the small hit game state, for example, the operation of opening the large winning opening over the second period by the opening / closing plate provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is repeatedly executed until the second number of times equivalent to the second round number is reached. Is done. In the small hit gaming state, similarly to the two round big hit state, the period in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second period, and the number of executions of the operation in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second number. It may be controlled so that at least one of them is performed. After the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed, and the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, when a special figure game with a variable display result of “small hit” is executed, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the short-time state or the probability change state has reached a predetermined number, after the end of the small hit game state Is in the normal state after the short-time state or the probability variation state ends. A game in the small hit gaming state in which the number of times that the big winning opening is opened by the variable winning operation is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game, similar to the game in the two round big hit state. When the winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round in the two round big hit state is changed to the first state, the same as the two round big hit state in the small hit gaming state. In the aspect, the winning ball apparatus may be changed to the first state.

  In the probabilistic state or the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The second start condition is such that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of establishment. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in the probability changing state or the short-time state is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, it becomes easier to enter the big hit gaming state than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to either the certain change state or the short-time state. .

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R Then, the decorative display variable display state may be in a predetermined reach state (also referred to as “reach mode”). Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is changing, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. This is a display state that changes synchronously while constituting all or part of the combination. Corresponding to the reach state, a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or the display mode of the background image is changed. Or change the variation of the decorative pattern. Such a change in the display mode of the character image, the display mode of the background image, and the change in the variation mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) of the game effect lamp 9 and the like are the operation modes before entering the reach state. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the above. As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”).

  In addition, during the variable display of decorative symbols, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of decorative symbols may become the reach state, and the variable display result may be a “hit” In some cases, a specific effect for informing the player by a variable display mode of a decorative design or the like may be executed. In this embodiment, specific effects such as “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, “main notice”, “development chance item”, and “development opportunity item end” can be executed, and the variation pattern is on the main board 11 side. Corresponding to the determination, it is determined whether or not to perform each production operation. The specific effect in this embodiment is not particularly limited as long as the special figure change time changes depending on whether or not the corresponding effect operation is executed. For example, when the specific effect is executed, it is only necessary that the special figure change time becomes longer than when the specific effect is not executed.

  In the specific effect of “sliding”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then two or more decorative symbol display areas ( For example, after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc., a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “ 2 ”), the decorative symbols are changed again in the decorative symbol display area (for example, one or both of the“ left ”decorative symbol display area 5L and the“ right ”decorative symbol display area 5R), and then stopped and displayed. Thus, an effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped is performed. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, it is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing fluctuation display and changing the decorative symbol immediately after stopping for a short time. It is only necessary to notify that the decorative pattern is not fixed. Alternatively, in the temporary stop display, the decorative design may be re-fluctuated after the decorative design is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the decorative design that has been stopped is confirmed.

  In the specific effect of “pseudo-ream”, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols are displayed based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special game is established once. After the decorative symbols are changed in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then all the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C are displayed. The effect display for changing the decorative design again (pseudo continuous change) at 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times). As an example, in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, pseudo-continuous chance eyes GC1 as shown in FIG. 3A are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Any of a plurality of types of decorative symbol combinations predetermined as -GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, the “left symbol” shown in FIG. 3A and the like is a decorative symbol displayed (stop display or temporary stop display) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the “middle symbol” is “middle”. Are the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C, and the “right symbol” is the decorative symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R.

  The specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” may be set so that the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) increases. Thereby, the player can recognize that the specific effect of the “pseudo-ream” is performed by temporarily stopping display of any one of the pseudo-ream chances GC1 to GC8, and as the number of times of the pseudo-ream fluctuation increases. In addition, the expectation that the variable display result is “big hit” is enhanced. In this embodiment, based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) once to three times in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. It is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative design has been started 2 to 4 times in succession.

  In the specific effect of “main notice”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, Before the confirmed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at 5C and 5R (final stop display), the decorative symbols can be variably displayed, for example, by an effect display pre-associated with the reach effect or an effect display different from the pre-associated effect display. An effect display for notifying the player that the state may become a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit” is performed as an effect operation that becomes the main notice effect. .

  In the specific development of “Development Opportunity”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then all the decorative symbols display area 5L is displayed. At 5C and 5R, after the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, the predetermined display effect is started with the variable display state of the decorative symbols as the reach state. . As an example, in the specific effect of “Development chance eyes”, the development chance eyes HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 3B are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The decorative symbols constituting any of the above are temporarily stopped and displayed. Therefore, when any of the development chances HC1 to HC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, or the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. The expectation of the player is raised.

  In the specific effect of “end of development opportunity”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then all the decorative symbols are displayed. At 5L, 5C, and 5R, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern of a predetermined combination as a development chance is stopped and displayed as a final decorative pattern (final stop display). As an example, in the specific effect of “end of development opportunity”, any of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the specific effect of “expansion opportunity” are stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  Furthermore, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the specific effect, for example, by displaying the decorative pattern in a display mode other than the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, such as displaying a predetermined character image or message image. A sub-notice effect may be executed to notify the player that the variable display state may be a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit”. In this embodiment, sub-notice effects such as “character display”, “step-up image”, and “mail display” are set to be executable. It should be noted that the sub-notice effect in this embodiment may be any one that does not change the special figure variation time depending on whether or not the corresponding effect operation is executed.

  In the sub-notice effect of “character display”, two or more decorative symbols are displayed after the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the area (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.), a character image prepared in advance in a predetermined position in the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed. An effect display to be displayed is performed.

  In the sub-notification effect of “step-up image”, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, two or more decorative symbols are displayed. Before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the display area, a plurality of effect modes are provided by effect display in which a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance are switched and displayed in a predetermined order in the display area of the image display device 5. There may be a step-up effect operation that changes (steps up) in stages. In the sub-notice effect of “step-up image”, after any one of a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, The effect display in the sub-notice effect may be terminated without switching the image. As described above, the step-up effect operation is performed in response to one start winning a prize (one game ball has entered the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) or a decorative symbol. This includes a step-up notice effect in which a notice mode (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) changes (steps up) in multiple stages. In general, the greater the number of changes (number of steps), the higher the reliability (the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”). Also, depending on the number of steps in the step-up notice effect or the effect mode at each step, it becomes “15R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, a specific reach effect is executed, “15R normal big hit ”To“ 15R probable big hit ”, at least one of them may be notified in advance. Further, the object to be notified may be changed according to the number of times of change (number of steps). For example, “reach determination” may be performed when going to the second step, “super reach confirmation” when going to the third step, and “big hit confirmation” going to the fourth step. As the change of the notice mode (step-up), different character images may be displayed in order, or the step-up may be performed by changing the shape or color of one character. May be. That is, it is only necessary to be able to recognize that the state of the notice means (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as viewed from the player changes stepwise.

  In the sub notification effect of “mail display”, two or more decorative symbols are displayed after the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the area, in response to the operation button 30 being operated by the player, the effect operation such as changing the effect image display in the display area of the image display device 5 is changed. An effect display is performed. As an example, in the sub-notice effect of “mail display”, a predetermined effect operation serving as a button operation promotion effect is performed during variable display of a decorative symbol. The button operation promotion effect is an effect operation that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 by, for example, displaying an effect image such as a character image or a message image prepared in advance at a predetermined position on the display screen of the image display device 5. If it is. The effect operation that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 is not limited to an effect that causes the image display device 5 to display an effect image. LED for lighting or blinking in a predetermined lighting pattern, one for operating a movable member provided in a play accessory provided in or outside the game area in a predetermined operation mode, or any of these It may be a combination. When such a button operation promotion effect is performed, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is set. When the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is detected by the operation detection switch 31 within the operation effective period, the execution of the button operation promotion effect is stopped at the timing when the operation is detected, and prepared in advance, for example. One of the plurality of types of effect images is displayed on the image display device 5, and the sound effect corresponding to one of the plurality of types of sound patterns prepared in advance is displayed on the speaker 8L. Various effects such as output from 8R are executed.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as “non-reach” (also referred to as “unreach loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a confirmed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol showing the number “3”, which is a normal big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol that becomes a 15-round big hit symbol as a final special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, the fixed decorative symbol that is usually a big hit combination has, for example, a symbol number variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the image display device 5. Among the decorative patterns of “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative patterns whose design numbers are even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, “ What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”). In response to the fixed special symbol in the special figure game becoming the normal jackpot symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the variable symbol display mode of the decorative symbol in which the fixed decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped is displayed. This is referred to as a “normal” (also referred to as “normal jackpot”) variable display mode (also referred to as a jackpot type) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the “normal” variable display mode, the game is controlled to the 15 round big hit gaming state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, the time reduction state is controlled.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. In response to the situation, a reach effect similar to the case where the jackpot type is “normal” is executed, or a reach effect different from the case where the jackpot type is “normal” is executed. Thereafter, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination has, for example, a symbol number variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Among the decorative patterns of “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative patterns having the odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “ What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative symbol of the probable big jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. This is referred to as a variable display mode of “probability change” (also referred to as a big hit type) when the display result is “big hit”.

  When the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the fixed decoration symbol that is a normal jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the decoration symbol. In this way, even when the fixed decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, if the probability variable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, it is included in the variable display mode of “probable change”. Thus, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “probability change”, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the positive change state. If the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a probable big hit symbol, after the fixed ornament symbol that is normally a big hit combination is stopped and displayed, the big hit game is played at the start of the big hit gaming state or during the round in the big hit gaming state The period from the end of one round in the state until the start of the next round, the period from the end of the last round in the jackpot game state to the start of the next variable display game, or the jackpot For example, during the first variable display game after the end of the gaming state, an effect operation for notifying that the state is controlled to the probability changing state may be performed.

  When a special symbol indicating the number “1” that is a two-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, for example, FIG. As shown in (C), any one of a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative symbols that are predetermined as the chance of chances TC1 to TC4 may be displayed in a stopped manner. In addition, when the special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state. Then, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a confirmed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Further, when a special symbol indicating the number “1” that is a two-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is not set to the reach state, and the predetermined symbol is displayed. There is a case where the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, or the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, various decorative decorative variable display modes in which various confirmed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a jackpot type) of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “sudden probability big hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “surprise accuracy”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the probability changing state.

  When a special symbol indicating the number “5” as a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the ornament is displayed in the same manner as when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “surprise”. After the variable display of the symbol is performed, the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is stopped or displayed, or the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. There are cases where the display is stopped, or a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach combination is stopped. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a special symbol indicating the number “5” as the small hit symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols on which various confirmed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is as follows. This is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. Here, the confirmed decorative pattern that is one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 3 (C) is stopped and displayed only when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “accurate”, and the variable display mode is “small”. When it is “winning”, it is not stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In other words, when the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display result may be “big hit” due to the variable display mode of “probable”. Determine. After the variable display result is “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state in which the variable winning action similar to the two round big hit state is performed, and when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed. Therefore, the gaming state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” continues. However, if it is determined that the probability change state or the short-time state is to be ended in response to the variable display game in which the variable display result is “small hit”, the normal state is returned after the end of the small hit gaming state. Will be controlled.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

  The relay board 15 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 4A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 4A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  In this embodiment, the first and second change start commands and the change pattern designation command are prepared as separate effect control commands. On the other hand, the designation content indicating which of the first special figure and the second special figure is to be changed and the designated content of the fluctuation pattern are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a special symbol (first special figure or second special figure) that starts change and a change pattern is prepared. You may enable it to specify the special symbol and fluctuation pattern which become a fluctuation start. Here, when the special symbol and the variation pattern that start the variation can be specified by one effect control command, the special symbol (the first special feature that starts the variation) for one variation pattern. There are cases where it is necessary to prepare two types of effect control commands according to the figure or the second special figure). On the other hand, if an effect control command for designating a special symbol for starting variation and an effect control command for designating a variation pattern are prepared separately, two types of effect control commands corresponding to the special symbol for starting variation are prepared. And the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of variation patterns may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4B, a pre-determined result indicating whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, and the variable display result is Different EXT data is set according to the big hit type determination result of whether the decorative symbol variable display mode (big hit type) is “normal”, “probability change”, or “surprise accuracy” in the case of “big hit” The More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result indicated in the variable display result notification command may be configured to be specified by one effect control command. As an example, an effect control command for setting EXT data corresponding to a combination of a variation pattern and a variable display result (one of “losing” and “big hit” and a big hit type in the case of “big hit”) is prepared. Then, information that can specify the variation pattern and the variable display result may be transmitted by the effect control command. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands. Here, when the variation pattern and the variable display result are configured to be specified by a single effect control command, a plurality of types of effects corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display results for one variation pattern. You may need to provide control commands. On the other hand, if the production control command for designating the variation pattern and the production control command for notifying the variable display result are prepared separately, the number of production control commands corresponding to the number of types of the variation pattern and the variable display result are provided. The number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8F00H is a decorative symbol stop command for designating stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (“fanfare command” that designates execution of an effect operation corresponding to the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, such as display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. It is also referred to as “ In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the corresponding relationship in the variable display result notification command.

  In this embodiment, a decoration symbol stop command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as an effect control command for designating stop of variable display of the decoration symbol. On the other hand, the decorative symbol stop command may not be transmitted. In this case, on the side of the production control board 12, the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is specified, and the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received. When the elapsed time reaches the specified special figure variation time, a setting for ending the effect executed corresponding to the special game is performed without receiving an effect control command from the main board 11. You can make it.

  The command A1XXH is a predetermined period of time in the big win game state or the small hit game state, such as displaying an effect image in a period in which the big prize opening is in the open state when the big hit game state or the small hit game state This is a command for specifying the opening of the big prize opening that specifies the execution of the rendering operation during the period of opening. The command A2XXH is a big winning mouth such as a display of an effect image (for example, an effect image in an interval between rounds) in a period in which the big winning opening is changed from an open state to a closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. This is a designation command after opening the big prize opening that designates execution of the rendering operation in a predetermined period (big prize opening closing period) of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state different from the opening designation command. In the special command during opening of the big prize opening or the designation command after opening the big prize opening, for example, the number of rounds executed in the round 15 big hit state (for example, “1” to “15”), the big in the round two big hit state or the small hit gaming state Different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of times the winning opening is opened (for example, “1” or “2”). In the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, regardless of whether the big winning opening is in the open state or the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, Alternatively, a continuous performance operation may be executed from the start point to the end point of the small hit gaming state.

  The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating execution of an effect operation corresponding to the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, such as display of an effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. In the winning end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command or the winning start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command or the hit start designation command. .

  The command B001H is for executing a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. This is a first start port winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition is satisfied. The command B002H is for executing a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting prize opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition is established.

  The command C0XXH is used to display the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in a start winning memory display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5 or the like. This is a pending storage count notification command for notifying the total pending storage count that is the total value of. In response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, for example, either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted as the reserved storage number notification command. Following this, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the reserved memory count notification command, for example, the total number of stored data (for example, “1” to “8”) of the reserved data in the first special figure reserved storage unit 151A and the second special figure reserved storage unit 151B shown in FIG. Alternatively, different EXT data is set corresponding to the total number of start data stored in the start data storage unit 151C (for example, “1” to “8”). Thereby, on the side of the production control board 12, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, and the first special drawing is received. The total number of stored hold data in the hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B can be specified.

  In this embodiment, the first and second start opening winning designation commands and the reserved memory number designation command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the notification content indicating which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied and the notification content of the total reserved storage number are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to the combination of the established start condition (the first start condition or the second start condition) and the total reserved memory number is prepared. The established start condition and the total number of reserved memories may be specified. Here, when it is possible to specify which one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied by one effect control command together with the total reserved memory number, for example, the upper limit value of the total reserved memory number is “8”. ”, It is necessary to prepare a total of 16 types of effect control commands of 8 types corresponding to the case where the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied. On the other hand, if an effect control command that can specify which of the first start condition and the second start condition is established and an effect control command that can specify the total number of reserved memories are prepared separately, the first It is only necessary to prepare a total of 10 types of effect control commands, that is, two types of effect control commands that can specify each of the start condition and the second start condition, and eight types of effect control commands that allow the total reserved memory number to be specified. The types of commands prepared in advance and the storage capacity of the command table can be reduced.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A random access memory (RAM) 102 that provides an area, a central processing unit (CPU) 103 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a random number circuit 104 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103, and I / O (Input / Output port) 105. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  In the main board 11, for example, the random number circuit 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type, and a random value MR2 for determining the reach 2. The numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern, and the random value MR5 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses the random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated independently of the CPU 103 by the random number circuit 104, and indicates the other random number values MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3 to MR5. The numerical data may be updated by software using the random counter by the CPU 103. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  The random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is controlled to determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as a big hit game state, or as a small hit game state as the "small hit". This is a random value used to determine whether or not to perform, for example, a value in the range of “1” to “65535”. For the jackpot type determination random number MR2-1, the jackpot type, which is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit”, is determined as “normal”, “probability variation”, or “surprise accuracy”. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”. The reach determination random number value MR2-2 is a random value used for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state when the variable display result is “lost”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. Takes the value of The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. Take.

  The random value MR5 for determining the general-purpose display result is used for determining whether the variable display result in the general-purpose game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per-normal” or “unusual for general-purpose”. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “150”. That is, the random number value MR5 for determining the normal game display result is a state where the game ball is difficult to enter the normal start-up winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result in the normal game (normally open state). ) Is used to determine whether or not to change to a state in which a game ball is likely to enter (expanded open state).

  FIG. 6 shows the decorations prepared in advance corresponding to the cases where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”. The pattern variation pattern is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-7, non-reach PB1- 1 and non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1 and non-reach PC1-2 variation patterns are prepared. In addition, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1 to super PA3-8, super PB3-1 to super PB3− are the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”. 5. Fluctuation patterns of Super PC 3-1 to Super PC 3-4 are prepared. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”).

  FIG. 7 illustrates a variation pattern prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8 and super PA4 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative display variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. -1 to super PA4-8, super PA5-1 to super PA5-4, super PB4-1 to super PB4-4, super PB5-1 to super PB5-4, super PD1-1 and super PD1-2, super PE1 -1 and super PE1-2, special PG1-1 to special PG1-4, special PG2-1 to special PG2-3, and special PG3-1 to special PG3-3 are prepared. Here, in the variation pattern of “normal”, after the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state, for example, after the decorative symbol is displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C, the final stop is performed. The fixed decorative symbol that becomes the symbol is stopped and displayed. In the variation pattern of “Super”, after the decorative display variable display state reaches the reach state, for example, a special reach effect different from the variation pattern of “Normal” is performed, and then the final decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol Is stopped. In the “special” variation pattern, a special performance operation is performed or a special performance operation is performed in response to the case where the big hit type is “surprise” or the variable display result is “small hit”. Without being performed, the finalized symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. A variation pattern in which the variable display result corresponds to “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern, and a variation pattern in which the variable display result corresponds to “small hit” is referred to as a small hit variation pattern.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a variation pattern for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns of decorative symbols. Table data constituting the table is stored.

  FIG. 8 shows a configuration example of the symbol display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, as the symbol display result determination table, a first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 8A, a second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. An ordinary map display result determination table 130C shown in FIG. 8C is prepared in advance. The first special figure display result determination table 130A is a big hit with the variable display result as “big hit” before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. It is a table referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the gaming state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The second special figure display result determination table 130B is a big hit with the variable display result as “big hit” before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. It is a table referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the gaming state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. Before the fixed normal symbol which becomes the variable display result in the general symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is derived and displayed, the general symbol display result determination table 130C sets the variable display result as “per normal symbol” and receives the second start winning prize. It is a table referred to in order to determine whether or not to perform tilting control that makes a game ball easy to enter based on a random value MR5 for determining a normal display result.

  In the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, depending on whether the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 shown in FIG. 20 is off or on, A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to one of the variable display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. In this embodiment, the game is a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special graphic game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. Accordingly, determination tables with different allocations of determination values for variable display results are prepared. On the other hand, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B use a common determination table to determine whether to control the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. May be. Thereby, the data capacity memorize | stored in ROM101 can be reduced.

  In the ordinary figure display result determination table 130C, the comparison with the random number MR5 for determining the ordinary figure display result is made depending on whether the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 shown in FIG. 20 is off or on. The numerical value (determined value) to be assigned is assigned to the general map display result of “per standard map” or “standard map loss”. The general map display result determination table 130C has a plurality of types of general map change times corresponding to the determination result of whether or not the random value MR5 matches the determined value assigned to the general map display result of “per general map”. When the setting data for setting to any of the above and the random value MR5 matches the determined value assigned to the normal map display result of “per normal map”, it is easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening. Data for setting for setting the time for performing tilt control to be in a state (tilt control time) depending on whether the time reduction flag is off or on may be included.

  In the setting of the general map display result determination table 130C shown in FIG. 8C, the random number MR5 for determining the general map display result is any one of “1” to “15” corresponding to the case where the time flag is off. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the normal map display is “per normal map”, the random number MR5 for determining the general map display result is “1” corresponding to the case where the time flag is on. ”To“ 140 ”, so that it is determined that the result of the display of the“ standard map ”is“ per standard map ”. Allocated to display results. With such a setting, when the time reduction flag is on corresponding to the probability change state or the time reduction state, the variable display result in the general game is “ The probability of “per normal” is increased, and the frequency of tilt control for making the second start winning opening easy to enter the game ball can be increased. Further, the normal time fluctuation times TH3 and TH4 corresponding to when the time reduction flag is on are set shorter than the normal time fluctuation times TH1 and TH2 corresponding to when the time reduction flag is off. With such a setting, when the time reduction flag is on corresponding to the probability change state or the time reduction state, the normal time fluctuation time in the normal game is shorter than when the time reduction flag is off corresponding to the normal state. Thus, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the tilt control is performed so that the game ball can easily win the second start winning opening. Further, the tilt control time TK2 corresponding to the time reduction flag being on is set longer than the tilt control time TK1 corresponding to the time reduction flag being off. With such a setting, when the time reduction flag is on, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening than when it is off.

  FIG. 9 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 is based on the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” and it is determined to control the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variable display mode of symbols as one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “normal”, “probability change”, and “surprising accuracy”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, whether the value of the variation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 20 is “1” or “2”. Accordingly, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type is assigned to the “normal”, “probability change”, and “surprise” jackpot types. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the table data indicating the determination values assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types is the result of determining whether to control to the 15 round jackpot state or the 2 round jackpot state, and the end of the jackpot gaming state Later, it becomes data for determination corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to control to the probability variation state. For example, the table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “normal” or “probability” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result of controlling to the 15 round jackpot state, while being assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. The table data indicating the determined value corresponds to the determination result of controlling to the big round big hit state. In addition, the table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “normal” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result that the control is not controlled to the probability change state, while being assigned to the jackpot type of “probability change” or “surprise”. The table data indicating the determined value indicates the determination result that the control is performed in the probability variation state. The jackpot type determination table 131 is a value corresponding to the determined jackpot type (for example, any one of “0” to “2”) as a value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer 155 (a jackpot type buffer value). Table data (setting data) may be included.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 9, the allocation of the determined value for each jackpot type differs depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. For example, regardless of whether the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”, a value in the range of “1” to “36” is assigned to the “normal” jackpot type. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a value in the range of “37” to “82” is assigned to the jackpot type of “probability variation”, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value Is “2”, a value in the range of “37” to “100” is assigned to the jackpot type of “probability variation”. When the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a value in the range of “83” to “100” is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”, while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value When “2” is “2”, a decision value is not assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. With such a setting, the variable display result is set to “big hit” based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is established. When it is determined to control to the state, it is not determined to control the big hit type as “surprise” and control to the two round big hit state.

  10 and 11 show a configuration example of the big hit variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In this embodiment, jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132E shown in FIGS. 10A to 10C, FIGS. 11A and 11B are prepared in advance as the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables. Yes. When the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132E are determined (predetermined) to set the variable display result to “big hit”, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132E is selected according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. In other words, if the gaming state is one of a normal state, a probability variation state, and a short-time state, or if the gaming state is either a certain variation state or a short-time state, within a predetermined period of time. It is selected according to whether it is out of period.

  In this embodiment, in a special game state such as a probability change state or a short time state, the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed until the special game state ends is counted as a special game remaining number count value. The special game remaining number count value is a value of the special game remaining number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. And, when the special game remaining number count value is larger than “0” and equal to or smaller than a predetermined specific period determination value (for example, “10”, etc.), it is within the specific period and the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is determined that In other cases, it is determined that it is outside the specific period and the predetermined condition is not satisfied.

  In each jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A to 132E, it is compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the jackpot type is “normal”, “probability variation”, or “probability”. The numerical values (determined values) are normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to super CA3-6, super CB3-1, super CB3-2, special CA4-1 and special CA4-2, special CB4-1 and special CB4. -2, special CC4-1, and special CC4-2 are assigned to any one of the variation pattern types. The variation pattern type may be set in advance so that, for example, a variation pattern having the same effect mode in reach production is included in the same variation pattern type.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132E, a determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type differs depending on which of the multiple types of big hit types is determined. ing. For example, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 10A used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, whether the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”. Accordingly, the assignment of the decision values to the variation pattern types of the normal CA 3-1 and the super CA 3-2 is different. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, if the big hit type is “normal”, the decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3, while if the big hit type is “probable change”. No decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type of Super CA3-3. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, if the big hit type is “normal”, the decision value is not assigned to the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 3-4, while the big hit type is “probable change”. If so, a decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4.

  As described above, when the gaming state is any one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short time state, the assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern type differs depending on the jackpot type. In addition, a determined value may be assigned to a different variation pattern type depending on the jackpot type. In this way, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the jackpot type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be made different.

  When the big hit type is “surprise”, the big hit type is “normal” such as special CA4-1 and special CA4-2, special CB4-1 and special CB4-2, special CC4-1 and special CC4-2. Alternatively, a decision value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which a decision value is not assigned in the case of “probable change”. Thus, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type becomes “surprise”, when the control is made to the two round big hit state, the variation pattern type different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state is determined. be able to.

  When the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 10 (A) used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, and the gaming state definitely changes. 10B and FIG. 10C used when the game is in the state, and FIG. 11A and FIG. 11B used when the gaming state is the short-time state. In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D and 132E shown, assignment of determination values to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2 is different. In the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination tables 132A, 132D, and 132E, a decision value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 3-3, while in the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination tables 132B and 132C, the super CA 3-3 No decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type. As described above, when the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A (selected in the normal state) is selected according to the gaming state. ), Comparing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132B and 132C (selected when the probability variation state) and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D and 132E (selected when the time reduction state), the gaming state is the normal state, the probability variation state, The assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern type differs depending on which of the short-time states. In addition, a determined value may be assigned to a different variation pattern type depending on the gaming state. Thus, depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, different variation pattern types can be determined, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132B to 132E, in the special game state such as the probability variation state or the short time state, the variation in which the “normal” reach effect is executed depending on whether it is within or outside the specific period. A determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for the pattern type or the variation pattern type for which the “super” reach effect is executed is different. For example, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132B and 132C shown in FIGS. 10B and 10C used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable variation state, are within a specific period. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132C used, the normal CA3 is selected in response to the fact that the jackpot type is “normal” or “probability variation”, compared to the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132B used outside the period of the specific period. Many determination values are assigned to the variation pattern type of -1. Also, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D and 132E shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the short-time state are within a specific period. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132E used, the normal CA3 is selected in response to the fact that the jackpot type is “normal” or “probability variation”, compared to the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132D used outside the period of the specific period. Many determination values are assigned to the variation pattern type of -1. When the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132B to 132E are set and the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135B to 135E shown in FIGS. 14B to 14E are within a specific period, Compared to when the period is outside the specific period, the jackpot reliability in the “normal” reach production by the variation pattern included in the variation pattern type of the normal CA 3-1 is increased.

  In this way, when the gaming state is a special gaming state such as a probabilistic state or a short-time state, the allocation of the decision value for each variation pattern type differs depending on whether it is within or outside the specific period. Yes. In this way, it is possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type depending on whether the period is within or outside the specific period. If the variation pattern included in each variation pattern type is set so that variation patterns having the same effect mode in the reach effect are classified into the same variation pattern type, the special figure in the special gaming state is set. Based on the determination result of whether or not the predetermined condition that the time is within the specific period is satisfied based on the number of times of execution of the game, the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the specific reach effect can be varied. In addition, when it is within the period of the specific period, compared to when it is outside the period of the specific period, the big hit reliability in the reach production of “normal” is higher. Even when the reach effect is executed, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 12 shows a configuration example of the small hit variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C are prepared in advance as small hit variation pattern type determination tables. The small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C are tables that are referred to for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined (predetermined) that the variable display result is “small hit”. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C depends on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state in accordance with the table selection setting as shown in FIG. And selected as a use table. In each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, the numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are the variation patterns of the special CA4-1, special CB4-1, and special CC4-1. Assigned to one of the types.

  The variation pattern type of the special CA4-1 to which all of the determination values are assigned in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 12A is the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. In FIG. 5, a part of the determined value is assigned according to the case where the jackpot type is “surprise”. The variation pattern types of the special CB4-1 to which all of the determined values are assigned in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B shown in FIG. 12B are the big hit variation patterns shown in FIGS. 10B and 10C. In the type determination tables 132B and 132C, a part of the determination value is assigned in accordance with the case where the big hit type is “surprise”. In the variation pattern type of the special CC 4-1 to which all of the determined values are assigned in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133C shown in FIG. 12 (C), the big hit variation pattern shown in FIGS. 11 (A) and 11 (B). In the type determination tables 132D and 132E, a part of the determination value is assigned according to the case where the big hit type is “surprise”. As described above, the variation pattern types of the special CA 4-1, the special CB 4-1, and the special CC 4-1 are common to the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the case where the variable display result is “small hit”. Variation pattern types. That is, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132E, the table data corresponding to the big hit type “surprise” and the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C include a common variation pattern type. Is set.

  FIG. 13 shows a configuration example of a reach determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, reach determination tables 134A to 134E shown in FIGS. 13A to 13E are prepared in advance as reach determination tables. The reach determination tables 134A to 134E indicate whether or not to change the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbols to the reach state when the variable display result is determined to be “lost” (predetermined). -2 is a table referred to for determination based on -2. Each of the reach determination tables 134A to 134E is selected according to a table selection setting as shown in FIG. That is, if the gaming state is one of a normal state, a probability change state, and a short-time state, and if the gaming state is either a probability change state or a short-time state, it is within a specific period or outside the period Depending on whether it is. In each of the reach determination tables 134A to 134E, numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the reach determination random value MR2-2 are non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, and non-reach HB1. -2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2 determination result not reach, and reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 Assigned to one of the decision results.

  For example, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 13A, the value in the range of “1” to “204” is non-reach HA1-1 corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “0”. And a value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is “1”, a value in the range of “1” to “217” that is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-2. Assigned. A value in the range of “1” to “220”, which is larger than the number of determined values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 and the non-reach HA 1-2 corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is “2”, Allocated to reach HA1-3. Corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “3” or “4”, “1” to “230”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-3. The determination value in the range is assigned to the non-reach HA1-4. Corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is any one of “5” to “8”, “1” to “1”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-4. A determination value in the range of “235” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-5. With such a setting, when the total number of reserved memories, which is the number of held special figure games, is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, “3”), the variable display state of the decorative symbols is changed compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number. The rate at which the decision to reach the reach state is made is low. If the average special symbol variation time in the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average special symbol variation time in the variation pattern corresponding to “reach”. When the special figure holding storage number is equal to or larger than the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened as compared with the case where the special figure reserved memory number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the reach determination tables 134B to 134E, in the special game state such as the probability change state or the short time state, it is determined that the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state depending on whether it is within or outside the specific period. Determination values are assigned to the respective determination results so that the ratios to be determined are different. For example, among the reach determination tables 134B and 134C shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable change state, the reach used when it is within a specific period. In the determination table 134C, more determination values are assigned to the determination result of the reach HB2-1 than the reach determination table 134B used when the period is outside the specific period. Further, the reach used when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the short-time state, and is used within the period of a specific period among the reach determination tables 134D and 134E shown in FIGS. 13D and 13E. In the determination table 134E, more determination values are assigned to the determination result of the reach HC2-1 than the reach determination table 134D used when the period is outside the specific period. Due to the settings in the reach determination tables 134B to 134E, the determination ratio indicating that the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state is higher when the period is within the specific period than when the period is outside the specific period. Become.

  In this way, when the gaming state is a special gaming state such as a probability change state or a short-time state, the determination value for the determination result indicating that the reach state is set depending on whether it is within or outside the specific period The assignment is different. In this way, it is possible to vary the determination ratio of changing the decorative symbol variable display state to the reach state depending on whether it is within or outside the specific period. That is, based on the number of executions of the special figure game in the special game state, whether to change the decorative symbol variable display state to the reach state according to the determination result of whether or not the predetermined condition of being within the specific period is satisfied It is possible to vary the decision ratio of whether or not. In addition, when it is within the period of the specific period, the determination ratio that the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state is higher than when it is outside the period of the specific period. By increasing the appearance rate of the reach state, it is possible to increase the expectation that the variable display result will be a “hit” and to improve the interest of the game.

  FIG. 14 shows a configuration example of the reach variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135E shown in FIGS. 14A to 14E are prepared in advance as reach variation pattern type determination tables. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135E have a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type when the variable display state of the decorative symbol is determined to be the reach state. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. Each reach variation pattern type determination table 135A to 135E is selected according to a table selection setting as shown in FIG. That is, whether the gaming state is a normal state, a probability variation state, or a short-time state, and if the gaming state is either a certain variation state or a short-time state, it is within a specific period or outside the period. It is selected according to whether it exists. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135E does not depend on the table selection setting as shown in FIG. 14F, for example, any of the reach determination tables 134A to 134E shown in FIGS. May be selected as a use table depending on whether it is determined to reach the reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1. That is, when the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 13A is used to determine one of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as a use table. When the reach HB2-1 is determined using the reach determination table 134B shown in FIG. 13B, the reach variation pattern determination table 135B is selected as the use table, and the reach determination table 134C shown in FIG. When the reach HB2-1 is determined, the reach fluctuation pattern determination table 135C is selected as the use table, and when the reach HC2-1 is determined using the reach determination table 134D shown in FIG. The reach variation pattern determination table 135D is selected as the use table, 13 when it is determined to reach HC2-1 with a reach determination table 134E shown in (E) has a reach varying pattern determination table 135E may be selected as used table. This eliminates the need for data indicating table selection settings as shown in FIG.

  In each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135E, depending on whether the determination result indicating that the reach state is set is reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, or reach HC2-1. The numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR3 for determining the pattern type is the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2. Assigned to one. The variation pattern type may be set in advance so that, for example, a variation pattern having the same effect mode in reach production is included in the same variation pattern type.

  In the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A, depending on which of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3 is the determination result for reaching the reach state, the ratio determined for each variation pattern type is different. A determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type. For example, in accordance with the determination result of reach HA 2-1, a value (decision value) in the range of “1” to “128” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA 2-1, and the other values are super CA 2-2. And the super CA2-3 variation pattern type. Corresponding to the determination result of reach HA2-2, values in the range of “1” to “170” are assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. Further, values in the range of “1” to “182” are assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1 corresponding to the determination result of reach HA2-3. The reach HA 2-1 is determined by the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 13A to be compared with the reach determination random number value MR2-2 corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”. A value has been assigned. The reach HA 2-2 is assigned a decision value corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “1” or “2”. The reach HA2-3 is assigned a decision value corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “3” or “4” or any one of “5” to “8”. With these settings, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, “1”), the variation of normal CA 2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed is compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio determined for the pattern type increases. And, the variation time of the average special symbol in the variation pattern that executes the “normal” reach effect is shorter than the variation time of the average special symbol in the variation pattern that executes the reach effect other than “normal”. If the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the total number of reserved storage is less than the predetermined number.

  In the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135B to 135E, in the special game state such as the probability variation state or the short time state, the variation in which the “normal” reach effect is executed depending on whether it is within the specific period or outside the period. A determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for the pattern type or the variation pattern type for which the “super” reach effect is executed is different. For example, when the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135B and 135C shown in FIGS. 14B and 14C used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable variation state are within a specific period. In the reach variation pattern type determination table 135C used, a smaller determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the normal CA 2-1 than in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B used outside the specific period. Further, among the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135D and 135E shown in FIGS. 14D and 14E used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the short-time state, it is used when it is within a specific period. In the reach variation pattern type determination table 135E, a smaller determination value is assigned to the normal CA2-1 variation pattern type than the reach variation pattern type determination table 135D used outside the specific period. By setting in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135B to 135E, the super CA2-2, the super CA2-3, and the super CB2-1 are more in the specific period than in the specific period. The possibility (appearance rate) that a part or all of the reach effect that becomes “super” by the variation pattern included in the variation pattern type such as Super CB2-2 is executed is increased.

  In this way, when the gaming state is a special gaming state such as a probabilistic state or a short-time state, the allocation of the decision value for each variation pattern type differs depending on whether it is within or outside the specific period. Yes. In this way, it is possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type depending on whether the period is within or outside the specific period. If the variation pattern included in each variation pattern type is set so that variation patterns having the same effect mode in the reach effect are classified into the same variation pattern type, the special figure in the special gaming state is set. Based on the determination result of whether or not the predetermined condition that the time is within the specific period is satisfied based on the number of times of execution of the game, the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the specific reach effect can be varied. Also, when it is within the period of the specific period, the possibility (appearance rate) that part or all of the “super” reach effect is executed is increased compared to when it is outside the period of the specific period. The expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 15 shows a configuration example of a non-reach variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C are prepared in advance as non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination tables. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type when the variable display state of the decorative symbol is determined not to be the reach state. It is a table that is referenced to determine one of the types. Each of the non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C is selected according to a table selection setting as shown in FIG. That is, the game state is selected according to whether the game state is a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-short state. Each of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C does not depend on the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Depending on which determination result is selected from the determination results indicating non-reach such as non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, and non-reach HC1-2, the usage table may be selected. Good. That is, when the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-5 are determined, the non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as the use table, and the non-reach HB 1-1 and non-reach HB 1-2 are selected. If determined to be either, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and if determined to be either non-reach HC1-1 or non-reach HC1-2, the non-reach variation pattern type The determination table 136C may be selected as the usage table. This eliminates the need for data indicating table selection settings as shown in FIG.

  In each of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-. 1 and non-reach HC1-2, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is determined as non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, Non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3 and non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3 are assigned to any one of the variation pattern types. The variation pattern type may be set in advance so that a plurality of variation patterns are classified into a plurality of variation pattern types according to, for example, the length of the special figure variation time or the presence / absence of a specific effect.

  16 and 17 show a configuration example of the hit variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In this embodiment, hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 are prepared in advance as the hit variation pattern determination tables. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B change the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined). It is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number value MR4 for determination. The hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as a use table when the gaming state is a normal state or when the gaming state is outside a specific period in a special gaming state such as a probability variation state or a short time state. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as a use table when the game state is within a specific period in a special game state such as a probability change state or a short time state.

  In each hit variation pattern determination table 137A, 137B, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type indicates that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Is assigned to one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case. Further, in the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B, in the special game state such as the probability variation state or the short time state, the ratio determined for each variation pattern varies depending on whether it is within or outside the specific period. A decision value is assigned to each variation pattern so that a portion is included. For example, when the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be normal CA3-1, the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137A used when the period is outside the specific period and the hit fluctuation used when the period is within the specific period. In the pattern determination table 137B, the variation pattern of the normal PA 2-5 and normal PA 2-7 in which the specific effect is not executed, and the change pattern of the normal PA 2-6 and normal PA 2-8 in which the “slip” specific effect is executed. The assignment of decision values is different. Specifically, in the hit variation pattern determination table 137B, more decisions are made for the change patterns of the normal PA 2-6 and the normal PA 2-8 in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed than in the hit variation pattern determination table 137A. A value has been assigned. Due to the settings in the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B, the determination ratio for executing a part or all of the specific effect is greater when the period is within the specific period than when the period is outside the specific period. May be high.

  As described above, the assignment of the decision value to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect differs depending on whether the specific period is within or outside the specific period. Thus, it is possible to vary the determination ratio of executing the specific effect depending on whether the specific period is within or outside the specific period. In other words, based on the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state, the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the specific effect is determined according to the determination result as to whether or not the predetermined condition of being within the specific period is satisfied. Can be different. In addition, when it is within the period of the specific period, the possibility that a part or all of the specific effect is executed (appearance rate) is increased compared to when it is outside the period of the specific period, so that the variable display result is The expectation of becoming a “big hit” can be raised and the interest of the game can be improved.

  18 and 19 show a configuration example of the loss variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In this embodiment, loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B shown in FIGS. 18 and 19 are prepared in advance as loss variation pattern determination tables. The loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B are used for determining a variation pattern according to the presence / absence of a reach state and the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined (predetermined) that the variable display result is “lost”. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random value MR4. The loss variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a use table when the gaming state is a normal state or when it is out of a specific period in a special gaming state such as a probability variation state or a short time state. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B is selected as a use table when the gaming state is within a specific period in a special gaming state such as a probability variation state or a short time state.

  In each of the loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type corresponds to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. Assigned to one of multiple types of variation patterns. In the loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1- correspond to the case where the non-reach variation pattern type such as non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-3 is determined. Decided values are assigned to the variation patterns (see FIG. 6) that execute specific effects such as “slip”, “pseudo train”, “main notice”, and “end of development chance”, respectively. With such a setting, the non-reach PA1-4 corresponds to the determination result that the decorative symbol variable display result is “losing” and the determination result that the decorative symbol variable display state is not the reach state. ~ Determine to be one of the fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-7, and specify the specific effects of “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, “main notice”, and “end of development opportunity” (non-reach PA1-4 “sliding”) "Non-reach PA1-5 can execute" pseudo-continuous ", non-reach PA1-6" main notice "and non-reach PA1-7" end development chance ").

  For the variation pattern types of non-reach CA1-4, in the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. 15A, "217" to "" corresponding to the determination result of non-reach HA1-1. 241 ”range values (decision values) are assigned, and values (decision values) in the range“ 230 ”to“ 241 ”are assigned corresponding to the decision results of the non-reach HA 1-2. Values (decision values) in the range of “231” to “241” are assigned corresponding to the determination results of reach HA1-3, and correspond to the determination results of non-reach HA1-4 and non-reach HA1-5, respectively. A value (decision value) in the range of “237” to “241” is assigned. Here, with respect to the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, “1” to “204” correspond to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0” in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. A value in the range (decision value) is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-2, a value (determination value) in the range of “1” to “217” corresponding to the total pending storage number “1” is assigned in the reach determination table 134A. Yes. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-3, a value (determination value) in the range of “1” to “220” corresponding to the total pending storage number “2” is assigned in the reach determination table 134A. Yes. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 134A, the total pending storage number is a value in the range of “1” to “230” corresponding to “3” and “4” (decision value) Is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-5, in the reach determination table 134A, the total pending storage number is a value (determination value) in the range of “1” to “230” corresponding to “5” to “8”. Is assigned. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is larger than that when the total number of reserved memories is “0”. Lower. Further, when the total number of reserved memories is “3”, “4” or “5” to “8”, the total number of reserved memories is “0”, or “1” or “2”. Compared with the case of "", the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is low.

  In the example of the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 6, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in which the specific effect is not executed is 5.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2. 3.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-3 is 1.50 seconds. On the other hand, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the “slip” specific effect is executed is 8.25 seconds, and the non-reach PA1 in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of −5 is 16.70 seconds, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-6 in which the specific effect of “main notice” is executed is 7.75 seconds, The special figure change time in the change pattern of the non-reach PA 1-7 in which the specific effect “end of development opportunity end” is executed is 9.25 seconds. That is, the special figure change time in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is executed corresponding to “non-reach” is longer than the special figure change time in the change pattern in which the specific effect is not executed. When the total number of reserved memories is “1” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 that executes the specific effect is lower than when it is “0”. In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than that when it is less than “3”. Thus, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B, the variation pattern determining table 138A and 138B is used for determining the variation pattern so that the variation pattern type of “normal” reach production such as normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4 is included in the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. A decision value to be compared with the random number value MR4 is assigned. Further, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α1 such as super PA3-1 to super PA3-4 and the change pattern for executing the reach effect α2 such as super PA3-5 to super PA3-8 are the variation pattern types of the super CA2-2. A determination value to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is allocated so as to be included. It is compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern so that the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1 such as the super PB3-1 to the super PB3-5 is included in the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 or the super CB2-1. A decision value is allocated.

  In addition, for example, the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, such as the variation pattern of Super PA 3-4, Super PA 3-8, and Super PB 3-4, is a decorative pattern after the pseudo-variable variation is performed. The variation pattern type is classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect executed based on the fact that the variable display state becomes the reach state. That is, since the variation pattern of the super PA 3-4 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect α1, in the loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B, corresponding to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2, A random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PA 3-8 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect α2, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B. A random number value MR4 for determination is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PB 3-4 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1, it corresponds to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-3 or the super CB 2-1 is used in the loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B. Thus, a random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned.

  For the variation pattern types of normal CA 2-1 and super CA 2-2, the variation pattern type determination is performed in any of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135E shown in FIGS. Random number value MR3 is assigned. For the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A, 135D, and 135E shown in FIGS. The numerical value MR3 is assigned. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CB2-1 in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135B and 135C shown in FIGS. 14B and 14C. As described above, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135E shown in FIGS. 14A to 14E, the rendering operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbols has reached the reach state. Table data (determination data) is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified according to the type. Also, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135E, the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the decorative display variable display state becomes the reach state after executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect. The table data is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified by the above.

  The loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B include a portion in which the ratio determined for each variation pattern differs depending on whether the game is within a specific period or outside the specific period in a special game state such as a probability variation state or a short time state. As shown, a decision value is assigned to each variation pattern. As an example, when it is determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CB1-3, it is used when it is within the period of the specific period and the loss variation pattern determination table 138A used when it is outside the period of the specific period. In the loss variation pattern determination table 138B, the determination values of the variation pattern of the non-reach PB1-1 in which the specific effect is not executed and the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-7 in which the specific effect of “end of development opportunity” is executed are determined. The assignment is different. Specifically, in the loss variation pattern determination table 138B, more determination values than the loss variation pattern determination table 138A are obtained for the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-7 in which the specific effect of “end of development opportunity” is executed. Is assigned. Due to the settings in the loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B, when it is within the period of the specific period, the determination ratio for executing part or all of the specific effect is greater than when it is outside the period of the specific period. May be high.

  As another example, when the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is determined, the loss variation pattern determination table 138A used when the variation pattern type is outside the specific period, and when the variation pattern type is within the specific period With the lost variation pattern determination table 138B used, the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed and the variation of the non-reach PA1-7 in which the specific effect of “end of development opportunity” is executed The assigned values of the pattern and the non-reach PA1-5 variation pattern in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed and the non-reach PA1-6 change pattern in which the “main notice” specific effect is executed are different. ing. Specifically, in the loss variation pattern determination table 138B, the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-5 in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed and the specific effect of the “main notice” are performed, compared to the loss variation pattern determination table 138A. Many decision values are assigned to the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-6 to be executed. Due to the settings in the loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B, a predetermined specific effect such as “pseudo train” or “main notice” is generated when the period is within the specific period compared to when the period is outside the specific period. While the determination rate of executing is high, the determination rate of executing other specific effects such as “slip” and “end of development opportunity” may be low.

  As described above, the assignment of the decision value to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect differs depending on whether the specific period is within or outside the specific period. Thus, it is possible to vary the determination ratio of executing the specific effect depending on whether the specific period is within or outside the specific period. In other words, based on the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state, the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the specific effect is determined according to the determination result as to whether or not the predetermined condition of being within the specific period is satisfied. Can be different. In addition, when it is within the period of the specific period, the possibility that a part or all of the specific effect is executed (appearance rate) is increased compared to when it is outside the period of the specific period, so that the variable display result is The expectation of becoming a “big hit” can be raised and the interest of the game can be improved.

  If it is determined that the variation pattern type is super CA2-3, the determination value is also determined for the variation pattern of normal PA2-1 if it is the loss variation pattern determination table 138A used outside the specific period. Is assigned. On the other hand, in the loss variation pattern determination table 138B used when it is within the period of the specific period, it is determined for the variation pattern of the normal PA 2-1 when it is determined as the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-3. No value has been assigned. Even with such settings in the loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B, as in the settings in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135B to 135E, when it is within the specific period, it is outside the specific period. In comparison, the possibility (appearance rate) that the “normal” reach effect or the “super” reach effect is executed can be made different. Also, when it is within the period of the specific period, the possibility (appearance rate) that part or all of the “super” reach effect is executed is increased compared to when it is outside the period of the specific period. The expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 20 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 20 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a start data storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control. A timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A is a special game in which a game ball wins a first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting condition is satisfied but the first starting condition is not satisfied. The hold data of (a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure hold storage unit 151A is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the first start condition by winning in association with the hold number in the order of winning in the first start winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type are reserved data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). .

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B receives the game ball at the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start condition is satisfied, but the second start condition is not satisfied. Hold data of a game (a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the winning in association with the holding number in the winning order to the second starting winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type are reserved data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). .

  The start data storage unit 151C stores start data indicating which game ball has won in either the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, so that the winning order of each game ball can be specified. As an example, the start data storage unit 151 </ b> C stores “first” start data indicating a winning at the first start winning port or “second” start data indicating a winning at the second start winning port. The game ball is stored in association with the hold number according to the winning order of the game balls.

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, and the like.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. In step S15 of FIG. 43 executed for control and the special symbol process shown in FIG. 44, which process is to be selected and executed is instructed. The normal symbol process flag is used to select / execute processing in step S16 of FIG. 43 or the normal symbol process shown in FIG. 51 in order to control the progress of the normal symbol game using the normal symbol by the normal symbol indicator 20. Tell what to do.

  The big hit flag is set to the on state in response to the determination (predetermined) that the variable display result is “big hit” when the special game is started. On the other hand, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off in response to the big hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. The probability change flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the probability change state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the end of the probability change state. . The time reduction flag is set to an on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko machine 1 being controlled to a time reduction state or a probability change state, while being cleared in response to the completion of the time reduction state or the probability change state. Is turned off.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, the time for controlling the progress of the big hit gaming state on the main board 31 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to a time measured to control the progress of the big hit gaming state, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the game control process timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time, such as a start time of a big hit gaming state, and counts up periodically.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a variable symbol display time (special figure variation time) in the special figure game. . As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The universal variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the universal diagram game such as a variable symbol display time (ordinary variation time) of the normal symbol in the ordinary game. . As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a random counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, a total reserved memory number counter, a special game remaining number counter, a round number counter, and the like. ing.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 counts a part of numerical data indicating a random number value used for controlling the progress of the game, separately from the random number circuit 104, so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software. belongs to. For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR5 is stored as random count values. The numerical data indicating the numerical value is updated.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total reserved memory number is stored in the total reserved memory number counter as a total reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the total reserved memory number )

  The special game remaining number counter can specify the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed until the special game state ends when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a special game state such as a probable change state or a short time state. It is for counting. As an example, in the special game remaining number counter, data indicating a predetermined initial count value is set as the special game remaining number count value when the big hit gaming state ends. The special game remaining number count value set at this time may be varied according to the jackpot type. As an example, if the jackpot type buffer value is “0” corresponding to the fact that the jackpot type in the variable display that has been controlled to the jackpot gaming state is “normal”, the jackpot gaming state is Data indicating the initial count value “100” at the end is set as the special game remaining number count value. On the other hand, the jackpot type buffer value is “1” or “2” corresponding to the fact that the jackpot type in the variable display that triggered the jackpot gaming state is “probable change” or “surprise”. When the big hit gaming state ends, data indicating the initial count value “70” is set as the special game remaining number count value. Thereafter, until the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the special game remaining number count value is updated by 1 or the like every time the special figure game ends. Then, when the special game remaining number count value reaches “0”, the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are cleared and turned off, for example, to end the probability change state or the time reduction state and shift to the normal state. Is done.

  The round number counter is for counting the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round is completed and the next round is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated.

  Game control buffer setting unit 155 Various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a variable special figure designation buffer, a jackpot type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality of buffer areas (for example, “12”), and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 101 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, “1” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Further, “2” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, in response to the end of the special figure game, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0”.

  The big hit type buffer stores a buffer value corresponding to a determination result in which the big hit type is one of a plurality of types when the variable display result is “big hit”. As an example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 9, if the jackpot type is “normal”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “0”, and the jackpot type is “probable change”. For example, “1” is set to the big hit type buffer value, and “2” is set to the big hit type buffer value if the big hit type is “surprise”.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes a program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. Alternatively, while the production control CPU 120 is built in the production control microcomputer, at least one of the ROM 121 and the RAM 122 may be externally attached to the production control microcomputer. The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal to the sound control board 13, and a lamp control board 14. On the other hand, wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal is connected. Furthermore, the effect control board 12 is also connected to wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation button 30 has been detected from the operation detection switch 31.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. FIG. 21 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 21, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 12, random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, temporary stop symbols for promotion effect determination Random number value SR2, random number value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of slipping / development chance, random number values SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols, execution of changing promotion effect Random value SR5-1 for determination, Random value SR5-2 for determining execution of jackpot promotion effect, Random value SR6-1 for determining sliding pattern, Random value SR6-2 for determining main notice pattern, Sub notice pattern type Numerical data indicating each of the random number value SR7 for determination and the random number values SR8-1 to SR8-3 for determining the first to third sub-notice patterns is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The effect control CPU 120 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 124 such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. 43, for example, to update various numerical data by software. Numerical data indicating a part of the numerical values SR1 to SR8-3 may be counted. When the random number circuit 124 is not mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 may count numerical data indicating all of the random number values SR1 to SR8-3 using a random counter. Good.

  The random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “decided” symbols that are variable display results of the ornament symbols, “left”, “middle”, “right” in the image display device 5. ”Is a random number value used to determine a decorative symbol (final stop symbol) derived and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the final stop symbol here is finally stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the decorative symbol variable display ends. These are the three decorative designs. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “96”.

  The random value SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the promotion effect is temporarily stopped at the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for "left", "middle", and "right" when executing the promotion effect during change. It is a random value used to determine the decorative pattern of the normal jackpot combination to be displayed, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”. The random value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of slipping / development chance is used when the specific effect of “slip” is executed, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display area 5L when the specific effect is executed. In the case where a decorative design (temporary stop design) to be displayed in a temporary stop at any one of 5R and a specific effect of “Development Chance” are executed, “Left”, “Middle”, This is a random value used to determine a decorative symbol (temporary stop symbol) to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and is a value in the range of “1” to “101”. Take. The random numbers SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols are “left” when the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, This is a random value used for determining a decorative symbol (temporary stop symbol) to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As an example, the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-1 takes a value in the range of “1” to “211”, and the second pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-2. Takes a value in the range of “1” to “229”, and the random value SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “311”.

  The random value SR5-1 for determining execution of changing promotion effect is a random value used to determine whether or not to execute the changing promotion effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. . The random value SR5-2 for determining the execution of the jackpot promotion effect is a random value used for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “101”. . The random value SR6-1 for determining the slip pattern is a random value used to determine one of a plurality of types of slip patterns corresponding to the content of the specific effect when the specific effect of "slip" is executed. It is a numerical value and takes a value in the range of “1” to “71”. The random number SR6-2 for determining the main notice pattern is used to determine the main notice pattern corresponding to the content of the specific effect as one of a plurality of types when the specific effect of the “main notice” is executed. This is a random value to be used, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “150”.

  The random value SR7 for determining the sub-notice pattern type determines whether or not to execute the sub-notice effect, and determines the sub-notice pattern type when executing the sub-notice effect to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. This is a random value used for this purpose and takes a value in the range of “1” to “191”. The random values SR8-1 to SR8-3 for determining the first to third sub-notice patterns are random values used for determining one of a plurality of types of sub-notice patterns prepared in advance. As an example, the random number SR8-1 for determining the first sub-notice pattern is used to determine the sub-notice pattern in the sub-notice effect of “character display” and has a value in the range of “1” to “499”. Take. The random number SR8-2 for determining the second sub-notice pattern is used to determine the sub-notice pattern in the sub-notice effect of the “step-up image”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “1009”. The random number SR8-3 for determining the third sub-notice pattern is used to determine a sub-notice pattern in the “mail display” sub-notice effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “200”.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the production control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and controls.

  22A to 22D show configuration examples of final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160D stored in the ROM 121. FIG. The final stop symbol determination tables 160 </ b> A to 160 </ b> D are tables that are referred to in order to determine a combination of decorative symbols to be a definite decorative symbol from a plurality of predetermined non-reach combinations. For example, the final stop symbol determination table 160A includes a left final stop symbol FZ1-1 that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L among the predetermined decorative symbols that are a predetermined non-reach combination. Is a table referred to in order to determine the value based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. In the final stop symbol determination table 160A, the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 are numerical values that are compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol ( Decision value) is assigned. The final stop symbol determination table 160B includes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, which is a final symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, among the final symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. This table is referred to for determination based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the second final stop symbol determination random number SR1-2. In the final stop symbol determination table 160B, in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the symbol number “” of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. Numerical values (determined values) to be compared with the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol are assigned to “1” to “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 160C includes medium final stop symbols FZ1-3, which are finalized symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C among the predetermined decorative symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. This table is referred to for determination based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3, and the like.

  Here, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a left / right outcome determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 23. From the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, It is determined whether the output type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. In the final stop symbol determination table 160C, the decorative symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined according to the determination result of whether the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. Numerical values (determined values) to be compared with the random numbers SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol are assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8”.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B, a determination value is assigned to a portion where the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. It is not done. With such a setting, when a confirmed decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the determined decorative symbol combination can be prevented from being a reach combination or a jackpot combination. In the final stop symbol determination table 160C, the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is a combination of predetermined decorative symbols. The decision value is not assigned. For example, even if it is other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the portions that become pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 as shown in FIG. 3A, the development chances HC1 to HC8 as shown in FIG. In the portion, the portion that becomes the probability chance TC1 to TC4 as shown in FIG. 3C, and the portion that becomes a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. The decision value to be compared with the numerical value SR1-3 is not assigned. The combination of decorative symbols as shown in FIG. 24 is a combination including the same decorative symbols as the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8, the development chances HC1 to HC8, the odd chances TC1 to TC4, etc. , Such as the arrangement order of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “middle” and “right” is different, the player has pseudo chance chances GC1 to GC8, the development chances HC1 to HC8, and the chance of success. It includes a combination of decorative designs that are likely to be mistaken for eyes TC1 to TC4. With such a setting, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbols are pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8, development chance items HC1 to HC8, and random chance symbols TC1. It is possible to prevent a certain non-reach combination similar to TC4 or similar.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 22 (D) shows the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C when a specific effect of “end of development chance” is executed. 5R, the final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6, which are the final decorative symbols, are assigned the development chances HC1 to HC8 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. It is a table that is referred to to determine either. In the final stop symbol determination table 160D, numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol are assigned to the development chances HC1 to HC8.

  25A and 25B show configuration examples of the final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B stored in the ROM 121. FIG. The final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B are tables for determining a confirmed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination. For example, the final stop symbol determination table 162A includes a left final stop symbol FZ2-1 that is a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L among the fixed decorative symbols that are reach-losing combinations, and “ Reference is made to determine the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. Is a table to be played. In the final stop symbol determination table 162A, symbol numbers “1” to “1” of decorative symbols (left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1, FZ2-2) that are the same as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. 8 ”is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 162B includes the final final symbol FZ2-3, which is the final symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol pattern display area 5C, among the final symbol symbols that are reach-losing combinations. It is a table referred in order to determine based on random number value SR1-3 for stop symbol determination.

  The middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 constituting the reach-losing combination is specified by a symbol difference which is a difference value between the symbol numbers of the decorative symbols as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. That is, in the variable display of decorative symbols, the variation of decorative symbols is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and “left” → “right” → “ In the case of deriving and displaying a finalized decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol in a predetermined order such as “middle”, “left” and “right” other than the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C where the decorative symbol is derived and displayed last. After the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 derived and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the final stop symbol determination table 162B is used to determine “ The difference (design difference) between the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 derived and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined at this time, a confirmed decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 derived and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C is determined. In the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the third final symbol is added to some of the symbol differences “−2”, “−1”, “+1”, and “+2” corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value SR1-3 for determining the stop symbol is assigned. Corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, the third final stop symbol determination disturbance is partially added to the symbol differences “−2”, “−1”, “+1”, and “+2”. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the numerical value SR1-3 may be assigned.

  26A to 26C show configuration examples of the final stop symbol determination tables 163A to 163C stored in the ROM 121. FIG. The final stop symbol determination tables 163A to 163C are tables that are referred to in order to determine a combination of decorative symbols to be a definite decorative symbol from a plurality of predetermined jackpot combinations. For example, the final stop symbol determination table 163A is stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as fixed decorative symbols that are normally a big hit combination. It is a table referred to in order to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163A, the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the normal symbols that are the same as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are set. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned. In the final stop symbol determination table 163B, the left and right middle symbols that are stopped and displayed together in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed as finalized symbols that are probable big hit combinations. It is a table referred to for determining the right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. In the final stop symbol determination table 163B, the symbol numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” of the probability variation symbols that are the same as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are set. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned. The final stop symbol determination table 163C is stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as the confirmed decorative symbols that are any of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4. The left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1, FZ4-2, and FZ4-3 are tables that are referred to for determining the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163C, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned to each of the probability chance items TC1 to TC4.

  FIG. 27 shows a configuration example of the promotion effect determination table stored in the ROM 121. In this embodiment, as a promotion effect determination table, a changing promotion effect determination table 164A shown in FIG. 27A and a jackpot promotion effect determination table 164B shown in FIG. 24B are prepared in advance. . The changing promotion effect determination table 164A indicates whether or not the changing promotion effect is executed when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”. It is a table referred to in order to determine based on random number value SR5-1 for determination. In the changing promotion effect determination table 164A, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR5-1 for determining the changing promotion effect execution depending on whether the jackpot type is “normal” or “probability change”. Is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to execute the changing promotion effect. The jackpot promotion promotion determination table 164B indicates whether or not the jackpot promotion promotion execution is executed when the variable display result is “big hit” and the jackpot type is “normal” or “probability change”. It is a table referred to in order to determine based on random number value SR5-2 for determination. In the jackpot promotion promotion determination table 164B, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number SR5-2 for determining the jackpot promotion promotion execution depending on whether the jackpot type is “normal” or “probability change”. Are assigned to the determination result of whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, and to the determination result of whether to execute the promotion success effect or the promotion failure effect when the jackpot promotion effect is executed. Here, in the promotion success production, it is notified that it is in a probable state. On the other hand, in the promotion failure production, it is not notified that it is in a probable state. In the setting of the changing promotion effect determination table 164A shown in FIG. 27A, even when the big hit type is “normal”, the changing promotion effect is not executed at a constant rate (a ratio of 1/100). The decision is made. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is “normal”, the determined value in the changing promotion effect determination table 164A may be assigned so that the determination that the changing promotion effect is always executed is made. That is, when the big hit type is “normal”, the determined values in the range of “1” to “100” may be allotted to the determination result to execute the changing promotion effect.

  FIG. 28 shows a configuration example of the temporary stop symbol determination table 165 for the promotion effect among the temporary stop symbol determination tables stored in the ROM 121. The temporary stop symbol determination table 165 for the promotion effect is referred to in order to determine a decorative symbol to be displayed for temporary stop when the promotion effect during change is executed based on the random value SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the promotion effect. It is a table to be. In the promotion effect temporary stop symbol determination table 165, the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “6” of the normal symbols that are the same as the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3. 8 ”is assigned a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the promotion effect.

  FIG. 29 shows a configuration example of the slip pattern determination table 166 stored in the ROM 121. The slip pattern determination table 166 includes a plurality of slip patterns such as a slip TP1-1 to a slip TP1-4 based on a random value SR6-1 for determining a slip pattern when a specific effect of “slip” is executed. Thus, the table is referred to in order to determine a slip pattern as a use pattern. In the slip pattern determination table 166, non-reach PA1-4, normal PA2-2, normal PA2-4, normal PA2-6, normal PA2-8, super PA3-2, super PA3-6, super PA4-2, super PA4 -6, Super PA5-2, Super PB3-2, Super PB4-2, Super PB5-2, Super PC3-2, Super PC3-4, Super PD1-2, Super PE1-2, Special PG1-2, Special PG2 -2, according to a variation pattern (see FIGS. 6 and 7) in which a specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as a variation pattern of the special PG 3-3, each of the slip patterns TP1-1 to TP1-4 A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR6-1 for determining the slip pattern is assigned.

  In the sliding pattern of the sliding TP1-1, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the “left” and “right” decorative symbols are displayed. After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the areas 5L and 5R, the decorative symbols are displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, and then the decorative symbols are displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped is performed. In the sliding pattern of the sliding TP1-2, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the “left” and “right” decorative symbols are displayed. After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the areas 5L and 5R, the decorative symbols are displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and then the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed after being rapidly changed, thereby displaying the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped is performed. In the sliding pattern of the sliding TP1-3, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the “left” and “right” decorative symbols are displayed. After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the areas 5L and 5R, the decorative symbols are displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, and then the decorative symbols are redisplayed at a low speed and then stopped to display the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped is performed. In the sliding pattern of the sliding TP1-4, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the “left” and “right” decorative symbols are displayed. After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the areas 5L and 5R, the decorative symbols are displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and then the decorative symbols are redisplayed at a low speed and then stopped and displayed. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped is performed.

  FIG. 30 shows a configuration example of the main notice pattern determination table 167 stored in the ROM 121. The main notice pattern determination table 167 includes a plurality of main notice TP2-1 to main notice TP2-3 based on the random number SR6-2 for determining the main notice pattern when a specific effect of “main notice” is executed. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine the main notice pattern to be used from among the main notice patterns. In the main notice pattern determination table 167, non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3, super PB4-3, super In accordance with a variation pattern (see FIGS. 6 and 7) in which a specific effect of “main notice” is executed, such as a change pattern of PB5-3, each main notice pattern of main notice TP2-1 to main notice TP2-3 is changed. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR6-2 for determining the main notice pattern is assigned.

  Here, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, for example, the value of the previous effect buffer (previous effect buffer value) provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 shown in FIG. 43 is “1” to “3”. Depending on which one of the main notice patterns of the main notice TP2-1 to main notice TP2-3 corresponding to a plurality of types of presentation operations, the assignment of the decision value differs. The previous effect buffer value is set to “1” when the main notice pattern in the specific effect of “main notice” is determined as the main notice TP2-1, and “2” when it is decided as the main notice TP2-2. Is set to “3” when the main notice TP2-3 is determined. When the previous effect buffer value is “1”, the determined value is not assigned to the main notice TP2-1. When the previous effect buffer value is “2”, the determined value is not assigned to the main notice TP2-2. When the determined value is not allocated and the previous effect buffer value is “3”, the determined value is not allocated to the main notice TP2-3. With this setting, when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed according to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA 1-6, the same as the main notice pattern in the specific effect of “main notice” executed last time. The main notice pattern can be avoided.

  FIG. 31 shows a temporary stop symbol determination table at the time of sliding, which is used to determine a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when a specific effect of “slip” is executed, among the temporary stop symbol determination tables stored in the ROM 121. The example of a structure is shown. In this embodiment, the slip temporary stop shown in FIGS. 31 (A) to 31 (D) is used as a slip temporary stop symbol determination table for determining a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in a specific effect of “slip”. Symbol determination tables 168A to 168D are prepared in advance. The slip temporary stop symbol determination tables 168A to 168D are selected according to which of the slip patterns TP1-1 to TP1-4. That is, when the slip pattern is slip TP1-1, the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 168A is selected as the use table. When the slip pattern is slip TP1-2, the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 168B is the use table. If it is selected and slipping TP1-3, the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 168C is selected as the use table, and if it is slip TP1-4, the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 168D is selected as the use table. The In each of the temporary stop symbol determination tables 168A to 168D at the time of sliding, temporary stop symbols are obtained according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols in the decorative symbol display area for changing the decorative symbols again. A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols.

  For example, in the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 168A, a decoration that becomes the final stop symbol (right final stop symbol) in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by the slip pattern of the slip TP1-1. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the symbols, the determined values are assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the right temporary stop symbols KZ1-1. In the sliding temporary stop symbol determination table 168B, the decorative symbol which becomes the final stop symbol (left final stop symbol) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L where the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by the sliding pattern of the slip TP1-2. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, the determined values are assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-2. In the sliding temporary stop symbol determination table 168C, the decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (right final stop symbol) in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by the sliding pattern of the slip TP1-3. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, the determined values are assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the right temporary stop symbols KZ1-3. In the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 168D, the decorative symbol which becomes the final stop symbol (left final stop symbol) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L where the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by the slip pattern of the slip TP1-4. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, the determined values are assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4.

  FIG. 32 shows a pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol used to determine a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed in the temporary stop symbol determination table stored in the ROM 121. The structural example of the determination table is shown. In this embodiment, the pseudo continuous time shown in FIGS. 32A to 32D is used as a pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table for determining a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in a specific effect of “pseudo continuous”. Temporary stop symbol determination tables 169A to 169D are prepared in advance. Each of the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination tables 169A to 169D indicates that when the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, whether the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-8, Super PB3-4, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PA5-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Special PG1-3 Is selected as a use table in accordance with the remaining number of display operations that become pseudo continuous fluctuations (total re-variation) executed until is stopped and displayed. The remaining number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is, for example, “0” in the decorative symbol fluctuation (pseudo continuous fluctuation) in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, and the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed one time before that. The final stop symbol is set to “1” for the decorative symbol variation (pseudo continuous variation) and “2” for the decorative symbol variation (pseudo continuous variation) in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed twice before. This corresponds to how many times the pseudo-continuous variation (variation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed until the pseudo continuous variation in which the fixed decorative symbol is displayed is stopped.

  As an example, the quasi-continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 169A indicates that the quasi-continuous variation executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being non-reach PA1-5. When the remaining number of times is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, is temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol to be displayed, is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3, which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. . The pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination table 169B has a variation pattern of Super PA3-4, Super PA3-8, Super PB3-4, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PA5-4, Super PB4-4, Super When the remaining number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to being either PB5-4 or special PG1-3 is “1” , The left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1 as the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the right temporary stop symbol KZ2 as the right symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. -2, as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 to be the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C Be-option.

  The pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination table 169C has a variation pattern of Super PA3-4, Super PA3-8, Super PB3-4, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PA5-4, Super PB4-4, Super When the remaining number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to being either PB5-4 or special PG1-3 is “2” The left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the right temporary stop symbol KZ3, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. -2, as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3, which is the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C Be-option. The pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 168D indicates that the fluctuation pattern is “Super PB3-4” shown in FIG. 6, Super PB4-4, or Super PB5-4 shown in FIG. When the re-variation that becomes a pseudo-continuous variation is executed three times in the specific production of “”, the remaining number of pseudo-continuous variations that are executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “3”. Accordingly, the left temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the right symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. The right temporary stop symbol KZ4-2 is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ4-3 which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C.

  In the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination tables 169A and 169B shown in FIGS. 32 (A) and 32 (B), the symbol of the decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (left final stop symbol) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, respectively. According to the numbers “1” to “8”, the first pseudo-continuous temporary provisions GC1 to GC8 constituted by combinations of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value SR4-1 for determining the stop symbol is assigned. In the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 169C shown in FIG. 32 (C), the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 determined using the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 169B, Depending on whether the combination of the temporary stop symbol 2-3 is one of the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8, the pseudo-continuous composed of the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1, KZ3-2 and KZ3-3. A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol is assigned to the chance points GC1 to GC8. In the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 169D shown in FIG. 32D, the left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, the right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2, which are determined using the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 169C, Depending on whether the combination of the temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 is the pseudo-continuous chance GC1-GC8, the pseudo-continuous composed of the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, KZ4-3 A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol is assigned to the chance points GC1 to GC8.

  By determining temporary stop symbols using such pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination tables 169A to 169D, for example, as shown in FIG. 33, pseudo continuous variations (including initial variations) in a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. In accordance with the number of times of execution, the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed in pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8. Either can be determined.

  FIG. 34 shows a configuration example of the development chance temporary stop symbol determination table 170 among the temporary stop symbol determination tables stored in the ROM 121. The development chance temporary stop symbol determination table 170 uses a random number SR3 for determining a sliding / development chance temporary stop symbol as a decorative symbol displayed temporarily when the specific development of “Development Chance” is executed. This is a table that is referred to for determination based on In the development chance temporary stop symbol determination table 170, a slip / development opportunity temporary provision is added to the development chance items HC1 to HC8 constituted by combinations of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR3 for determining the stop symbol is assigned.

  FIG. 35 shows a configuration example of the sub-notice pattern type determination table 171 stored in the ROM 121. The sub-notice pattern type determination table 171 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of sub-notice pattern types based on the random number SR7 for determining the sub-notice pattern type. In the sub-notice pattern type determination table 171, when the variation pattern is any one of non-reach PA1-1, non-reach PA1-2, non-reach PB1-1, non-reach PC1-1, or non-reach PA1-3. In the case of non-reach PA1-4, non-reach PA1-6, non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-2, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super In the case of any one of PA5-3, super PB3-3, super PB4-3, and super PB5-3, the random value SR7 for determining the sub-notice pattern type is determined depending on the variation pattern other than these variation patterns. The numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the sub-notice pattern type of sub-notice CY1 to sub-notice CY3 Ri is devoted.

  Here, in the sub-notice pattern type determination table 171, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3. , A random number value for determining the sub-notice pattern type corresponding to the case where the variation effect (see FIGS. 6 and 7) is executed, such as a super PB4-3 and a super PB5-3. All decision values to be compared with SR7 are assigned without sub-notice. Therefore, when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed, the execution of the effect operation as the sub notice effect is limited. Here, in the specific effect of the “main notice”, after the variation of the decorative symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, When the effect display in the specific effect is started and the sub-notice effect is performed, the execution period overlaps. Therefore, in the sub-notice pattern type determination table 171, the “main notice” is specified by assigning a determination value so that there is always no sub-notice when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed. It is possible not to execute the sub-notice effect in which the effect and the execution period overlap.

  36 to 38 show configuration examples of the sub-notice pattern determination table stored in the ROM 121. In this embodiment, as the sub notice pattern determination table, a sub notice pattern determination table 172A shown in FIG. 36, a sub notice pattern determination table 172B shown in FIG. 37, and a sub notice pattern determination table 172C shown in FIG. Prepared in advance. When the sub-notice pattern determination table 172A is determined as the sub-notice pattern type of the sub-notice CY1, the sub-notice pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the random number SR8-1 for determining the first sub-notice pattern. It is a table that is referenced to determine. When the sub-notice pattern determination table 172B is determined as the sub-notice pattern type of the sub-notice CY2, the sub-notice pattern is set to one of a plurality of types based on the random number SR8-2 for determining the second sub-notice pattern. It is a table that is referenced to determine. When the sub-notice pattern determination table 172C is determined as the sub-notice pattern type of the sub-notice CY3, the sub-notice pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the random value SR8-3 for determining the third sub-notice pattern. It is a table that is referenced to determine.

  In the sub-notice pattern determination table 172A, the first one of the sub-notice patterns of sub-notice YP1-1 to sub-notice YP1-4 is selected according to the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR8-1 for determining the sub notice pattern is assigned. In the sub-notice patterns of sub-notice YP1-1 to sub-notice YP1-4, effect display in the sub-notice effect of “character display” is performed in different effect display modes. In the “character display” sub-notice effect, character images corresponding to the sub-notice patterns SUB1-1 to YP1-4 are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

  In the sub-notice pattern determination table 172A, there are no sub-notices, or the variation patterns for the sub-notice patterns of the sub-notices YP1-1 to YP1-4 depending on whether they are within the specific period or not. The assignment of the decision value according to the is different. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is any one of non-reach PA1-1 to PA1-4, non-reach PA1-7, non-reach PB1-1, and non-reach PC1-1, More determination values are assigned to the sub-notice pattern of the sub-notice YP1-1 than when it is outside the specific period. With such a setting, the possibility that the sub-notice effect is executed (appearance rate) may be higher when it is within the specific period than when it is outside the specific period.

  In this way, the assignment of the decision value to the sub-notice pattern for executing the sub-notice effect differs depending on whether it is within or outside the specific period. In this way, it is possible to vary the determination ratio of executing the sub-notice effect depending on whether it is within the specific period or outside the specific period. In other words, based on the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state, the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the sub-notice effect according to the determination result of whether or not the predetermined condition is within the specific period Can be different. In addition, when the time is within the specific period, the possibility that the sub-notice effect is performed (appearance rate) is increased compared to when the period is outside the specific period, so that the variable display result is “big hit”. Can increase the sense of expectation and improve the interest of the game.

  In the sub-notice pattern determination table 172B, the second notice pattern is displayed in the sub-notice pattern of any of the sub-notice YP2-1 to the sub-notice YP2-4 according to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR8-2 for determining the sub-notice pattern is assigned. In the sub-notice patterns SUB2-1 to YP2-4, the effect display in the sub-notice effect of the “step-up image” is performed in different effect display modes. In the sub-notice effect of “step-up image”, any one of a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and each of sub-notice YP2-1 to sub-notice YP2-4 is displayed. Corresponding to the sub-notice pattern, a plurality of types of effect images may be switched and displayed in a predetermined order, or the effect images may not be switched.

  In the sub-notice pattern determination table 172C, the sub-notice pattern of the sub-notice YP3-1 to the sub-notice YP3-3 is selected according to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value SR8-3 for determining the sub-notice pattern is assigned. In the sub-notice patterns of sub-notice YP3-1 to sub-notice YP3-3, the effect display in the sub-notice effect of “mail display” is performed in different effect display modes. In the “mail display” sub-notice effect, an effect image prompting the operation of the operation button 30 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and then the sub-notice YP 3-1 is operated in response to the operation button 30 being operated. While displaying the effect image corresponding to each sub-notice pattern of the sub-notice YP3-3, if the operation button 30 is not operated, the effect image corresponding to each sub-notice pattern is not displayed. Thus, in the sub-notice effect of “mail display”, an operation time notice effect in which the effect operation changes according to the operation of the operation button 30 is executed.

  In the sub-notice pattern determination tables 172B and 172C, similarly to the sub-notice pattern determination table 172A, there is no sub-notice or whether each sub-notice pattern is within a specific period or outside the period. You may set so that the allocation of the decision value according to each variation pattern to differs. With these settings, depending on whether it is within or outside of a specific period, the decision ratio for executing various sub-notice effects such as “step-up display” and “mail display”, and each sub-notice effect It is possible to vary the determination ratio of the production mode.

  The ROM 121 stores an effect control pattern table that stores a plurality of types of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 120 to control various effect operations. For example, the effect control pattern table includes a symbol variation control pattern table, a notice effect control pattern table, and various effect control pattern tables. In this embodiment, as the symbol variation control pattern included in the effect control pattern table, the symbol variation control pattern 180 shown in FIG. 39 is prepared in advance, and as the notice effect control pattern table included in the effect control pattern table, as shown in FIG. 41 is prepared in advance, and various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. 41 are prepared in advance as various effect control pattern tables included in the effect control pattern table.

  In the symbol variation control pattern table 180, the image display device 5 corresponds to a plurality of variation patterns or the like in a period from when the variation of the ornament symbol is started until when the final symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Such as variable display operation of decorative designs on the display screen of, display operation of display in reach production, display operation of decorative design in specific productions such as `` slip '', `` pseudo-ream '', `` main notice '', `` expansion chance '', It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating the control contents of various performance operations as symbol variation control patterns. Each symbol variation control pattern includes various effect operations according to variable display of decorative symbols such as effect control process timer setting value, effect control process timer judgment value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is only necessary to set various contents of the effect control, the timing of switching the effect control, and the like in time series. It should be noted that in the symbol variation control pattern table 180, only a plurality of types of data indicating the control contents of a predetermined effect operation related to variable display of decorative symbols may be stored as symbol variation control patterns. In this case, for example, the control content of the rendering operation not related to the variable display of the decorative design, such as the display operation of the rendering image superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the variable display of the decorative design regardless of the variation pattern. A plurality of types of data may be stored as predetermined presentation control patterns in a predetermined control pattern table different from the symbol variation control pattern table.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, data indicating the variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data indicating the voice output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects in conjunction with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol, for example. Yes. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitter, such as a game effect lamp 9. That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the lighting operation of the light emitter. The effect control pattern may include movable member control data. The movable member control data includes data indicating an operation mode of the effect movable member installed inside or outside the game area, such as an effect movable member connected to a predetermined motor. That is, the movable member control data is data that designates a driving operation of the movable member. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  In the notice effect control pattern table 181, a plurality of types of data indicating the control content of the effect operation in the notice effect are stored as the notice effect control pattern corresponding to a plurality of types of display system notice patterns and member system notice patterns. Just do it. Each notice effect control pattern corresponding to the sub notice effect includes various effect operations corresponding to variable display of decorative symbols such as effect control process timer judgment value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is composed of control data for control, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, timing control switching timing, and the like in time series. The notice effect control pattern for executing the sub notice effect is included in the symbol variation control pattern stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 180 as indicating the content of the effect operation related to the variable display of the decorative symbol. You may comprise.

  As an example, the notice effect control pattern table 181 includes the notice effect control patterns of the sub notice CYP1-1 to the sub notice CYP1-4 corresponding to the sub notice patterns of the sub notice YP1-1 to the sub notice YP1-4. Is stored. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP1-1 displays the character image MC101 corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP1-1. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP1-2 displays the character image MC101 and the character image MC102 corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP1-2. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP1-3 displays the character image MC101 and the character image MC103 corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP1-3. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP1-4 displays the character images MC101 to MC103 corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP1-4.

  In addition, the notice effect control pattern table 181 includes the notice effect control patterns of the sub notice CYP2-1 to the sub notice CYP2-4 corresponding to the sub notice patterns of the sub notice YP2-1 to the sub notice YP2-4. Stored. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP2-1 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP2-1, and the sub notice is not performed without switching the effect image. The production ends. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP2-2 displays the effect image of the second step corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP2-2, and ends the sub notice effect without switching the effect image. To do. The notice effect control pattern of the sub-notice CYP2-3 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the sub-notice pattern of the sub notice YP2-3 and switches the effect image to the effect image of the second step. The sub notice effect is finished. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP2-4 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP2-4, switches the effect image to the effect image of the second step, and After switching to the effect image of the third step, the sub notice effect is ended.

  In addition, the notice effect control pattern table 181 stores the notice effect control patterns of the sub notice CYP3-1-1 and the sub notice CYP3-1-2 corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP3-1. Sub notice CYP3-2-1 and sub notice CYP3-2-2 notice effect control patterns are stored corresponding to the notice YP3-2 sub notice pattern, and sub notice YP3-3 corresponding to the sub notice pattern. The notice effect control patterns of the notice CYP3-3-1 and the sub notice CYP3-3-2 are stored. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP3-1-1 displays the effect image before the operation of the operation button 30 is detected, corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP3-1. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP3-1-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP3-1. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP3-2-1 displays the effect image before the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP3-2. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP3-2-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP3-2. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP3-3-1 displays the effect image before the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP3-3. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP3-3-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP3-3.

  The various effect control pattern table 182 only needs to store a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls during the period when the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Each production control pattern is, for example, a production control process timer setting value, production control process timer judgment value, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, completion code, etc. It is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control according to the time, the switching timing of the effects control, and the like in time series.

  The effect control pattern table may be an address management table that manages the storage addresses of pattern data constituting a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In this case, in the ROM 121, table data constituting the production control pattern table is stored in a predetermined storage area, and pattern data constituting individual production control patterns may be stored in an area different from this storage area. .

  As the effect control pattern table stored in the ROM 121, a separate effect control pattern table may be provided in accordance with whether it is within a specific period or outside the specific period. As an example, as shown in FIG. 42 (A), an effect control pattern table 185A corresponding to a case outside the period of the specific period and an effect control pattern table 185B corresponding to the case of being within the period of the specific period, The ROM 121 may be separately prepared and stored in advance. In this case, an effect operation may be controlled by reading out effect control patterns stored in different effect control pattern tables depending on whether the period is within or outside the specific period. Thereby, depending on whether the period is within or outside the specific period, the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 Depending on whether some or all of the operation modes in various performance operations, such as lighting operations or operations of movable members provided inside or outside the game area, are within a specific period or outside the period Can be different. For example, when it is within the specific period, when the change of each symbol in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. An effect operation for notifying the remaining number of special figure games (variable display of decorative symbols) that can be executed in a special game state such as a probability change state or a short time state by an effect image to be displayed or a sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. You may make it perform.

  The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, when variable display of decorative symbols is started. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the corresponding effect control pattern is configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect devices (light emitting bodies such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, and the effect movable according to the contents of one or a plurality of process data included in the effect control pattern. Control of a movable member such as a member is advanced. In each process data, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, and movable member control data associated with the production control process timer determination value indicate the control content of the production operation in the production device. Production control execution data for designating execution is configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, and the like. In the display control unit 122 that receives a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the VDP reads out image data indicated by the command from the CGROM and temporarily stores it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 43, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. ing. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 43 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state on the display screen of the image display device 5, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various kinds of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the timing of switching effect images to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Control. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for capturing various signals such as an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation detection switch 31, and the effect. And an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the control board 12. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound effect signal) transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 (Lighting signal) etc. are output.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the previous power supply stop. When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 44 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Following the information output process, a main random number value update process for updating at least a part of the random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation in the display device 4B, setting of the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade. After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 44 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the start winning determination process.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 46, the CPU 103 first corresponds to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A among the first start opening switch 22A and the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A provided in the ON state is on (step S201). At this time, if the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step S201; Yes), the first hold storage corresponding to the number of hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. It is determined whether or not the number is a predetermined upper limit value (eg, “4”) (step S202). For example, the CPU 103 may specify the first reserved memory number by reading the value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (first reserved memory number count value).

  If the first reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the first reserved memory number is incremented by 1, for example, by adding 1 to the first reserved memory number count value ( Step S203). Then, from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are extracted (step S204). . Numerical value data indicating each random number value extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, whereby each random number value is stored (step S205). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address (first address) of the first start opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, etc., to transmit the first starting opening winning designation command to the effect control board 12. Is set (step S206). The first start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 44 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After executing the processing of step S206, for example, by adding 1 to the value of the total reserved memory number counter (total reserved memory number count value) provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, the total reserved memory number is set to 1. Add (step S207). In addition, “first” start data corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening is stored at the head of the empty entry in the start data storage unit 151C (step S208). Then, for example, by setting the storage address of the reserved storage count notification command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, settings for transmitting the reserved storage count notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed (step S209). The reserved memory count notification command set in this way follows the first start winning prize designation command, for example, by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 44 after the special symbol process process is completed. The signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  If the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the OFF state in step S201 (step S201; No), or if the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes) ) Or, after the process of step S209 is executed, the detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the ON state. Is determined (step S210). At this time, if the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in an OFF state (step S210; No), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step S210; Yes), it is the number of the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. 2. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved memories is a predetermined upper limit value (eg, “4”) (step S211). For example, the CPU 103 may specify the second reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154.

  If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value in step S211 (step S211; Yes), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the second reserved memory number is not the upper limit value (step S211; No), the second reserved memory number is incremented by 1, for example, by adding 1 to the second reserved memory number count value. (Step S212). Then, from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are extracted (step S213). . Numerical value data indicating each random number value extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, whereby each random number value is stored (step S214). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the second start opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning designation command to the effect control board 12 is performed. (Step S215). The second start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 44 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After the process of step S215 is executed, the total reserved memory number is incremented by 1 (step S216), for example, by adding 1 to the total reserved memory number count value. Further, “second” start data corresponding to winning in the second start winning opening is stored at the head of the empty entry in the start data storage unit 151C (step S217). Then, for example, by setting the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, settings for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed (step S218). The reserved memory count notification command set in this way follows the second start winning prize designation command, for example, by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 44 after the special symbol process process is completed. The signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  Note that the processing in steps S203 to S209 and the processing in steps S212 to S218 shown in FIG. 46 may be executed using a common processing module (processing program). In this case, in response to the determination in step S202 that the first reserved storage number is not the upper limit value, for example, the address of the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A in the RAM 102 is configured by an internal register of the CPU 103 or the like. Set to the reserved storage pointer. At this time, for example, the address of the first pending storage number notification command transmission table stored in advance in the ROM 101 or the like is set in a command transmission pointer constituted by an internal register of the CPU 103 or the like. Further, for example, the address in the RAM 102 of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is set in a counter pointer constituted by an internal register of the CPU 103. On the other hand, in response to the determination in step S208 that the second reserved memory number is not the upper limit value, for example, the address of the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B in the RAM 102 is set in the reserved memory pointer. At this time, for example, the address of the second reserved storage number notification command transmission table stored in advance in the ROM 101 or the like is set in the command transmission pointer. Further, for example, the address in the RAM 102 of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is set in the counter pointer.

  Thereafter, by executing a common processing module as the processing of step S203 and step S212, the reserved memory number counter (the first reserved memory number counter and the second reserved memory number counter corresponding to the address set in the counter pointer). By adding 1 to the count value in any one of (1), it is updated so as to add 1 to either the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number. In addition, as the processing of step S204 and step S213, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type are extracted by executing a common processing module. Then, the numeric data indicating each extracted random number value is stored in the special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the address set in the reservation storage pointer (either the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B). ) At the beginning of the empty entry. In this way, the processing of step S205 and step S214 is executed using a common processing module. Subsequently, transmission is performed based on the table data read from the command transmission table corresponding to the address set in the command transmission pointer (either the first reserved memory number notification command transmission table or the second reserved memory number notification command transmission table). By setting control data in the command buffer, settings for transmitting either the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command are performed. In this way, the processing of step S206 and step S215 is executed using a common processing module. Further, as the processing of step S207 and step S216, by executing a common processing module, the count value in the total reserved memory number counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the total pending memory number by 1. In addition, as a process of step S208 and step S217, by executing a common processing module, for example, start data corresponding to the address set in the hold memory pointer ("first" start data and "second" start) Any one of the data) is stored at the head of the empty entry in the start data storage unit 151C. In addition, as a process of step S209 and step S218, a setting for transmitting a pending storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed by executing a common processing module.

  Thus, when performing the process of step S203-S209 and the process of step S212-S218 using a common processing module, first, it is game ball in the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth, such as the process of step S210 and the process of step S211. In response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the second start winning opening, the holding data is stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 151B in accordance with the detection of the game ball that has entered the second start winning opening, Processing corresponding to the case where a game ball enters the first start winning opening, such as the processing of step S201 and the process of step S202, is executed, and the hold data is stored in response to detection of the game ball entering the first start winning opening. You may make it perform the process memorize | stored in 151 A of 1 special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage parts. Accordingly, it is possible to check whether or not a game ball has entered both the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening in response to one timer interruption. Even when game balls enter the second start winning opening at the same time, the second start condition can be established with priority over the first start condition without fail.

  After the start winning determination process as described above is executed, one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 shown in FIG. 45 is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag. The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol storage unit 151A and the second special symbol storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not a first start condition for starting or a second start condition for starting a special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Also, in the special symbol normal process, whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. Judgment is made as to whether or not to control the small hit gaming state with the variable display result as “small hit”. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (the jackpot symbol and the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B). One of the lost symbols) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, based on a pre-determined result whether or not the variable display result is a “big hit”, a reach determined result whether or not the variable display state of the decorative design is a reach display state, etc. A process of determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types, a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type, and the like are included.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for performing setting for variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and after the special symbol starts variable display. It includes a process for measuring the elapsed time. It is also determined whether the elapsed time thus measured has reached the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern. When the variable display time is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed. A process for performing settings, a process for performing settings for transmitting a decorative symbol stop command to the effect control board 12, and the like are included. Note that the decorative symbol stop command may not be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In this case, on the side of the effect control board 12, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is specified, and the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative design is specified. When the display time is reached, the determined decorative design may be confirmed by completely stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative design without receiving the effect control command from the main board 11. Also, in the special symbol stop process, it is determined whether or not either the big hit flag or the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on, and when the big hit flag is on Updates the value of the special figure process flag to “4”, and updates the value of the special figure process flag to “8” when the small hit flag is on. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big winning opening is a process for starting the execution of the round in the big winning gaming state and setting the opening for the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” Etc. are included. At this time, for example, an upper limit of a period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with the setting of the big hit type. As an example, when the jackpot type is set to “normal” or “probability change”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”. On the other hand, when the big hit type is set to “surprise”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”. For example, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to determine the jackpot type setting by reading the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155.

  The special winning opening releasing process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This process during opening of the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the elapsed time measured, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. Processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. And when returning a special winning opening to a closed state, the process etc. which stop supply of the drive signal with respect to the solenoid 82 used for special winning opening doors should just be performed.

  The post-opening processing for the special winning opening in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The post-opening process for the big winning opening includes a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is in an open state has reached the maximum number of open big winning openings according to the jackpot type, This includes a process for making a setting for sending an end designation command when the maximum number of times of opening has been reached. Here, the maximum value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening is set to “15” when the big hit type is “normal” or “probability variation”, and is set to “2” when the big hit type is “surprise”. ing.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. This jackpot end process corresponds to a period in which an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state by the effect electric parts such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. For example, a process for waiting until the waiting time has elapsed and a process for performing various settings corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits is a setting for starting the execution of variable winning action in the small hit game state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, etc. The processing to perform is included. At this time, for example, the variable display result is “small hit”, so that the maximum value of the number of times that the big prize opening is opened is set to “2”, and the upper limit of the period during which the big prize opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”. You only have to set it.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door may be executed.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes determining whether or not the number of times that the big prize opening has been opened by the variable winning action has reached the maximum number of times the big prize opening is open, In this case, a process for performing a setting for transmitting a hit end designation command is included. At this time, if the number of times that the big prize opening is in the open state has not reached the maximum number of big prize mouth opening times, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8” or “9”, for example. The mouth may be opened again. And, for example, when the number of times that the big winning opening is opened in the small hit gaming state reaches the maximum number of big winning opening, the setting for transmitting a hit end designation command corresponding to the end of the small winning gaming state I do. As a result, the main board 11 notifies the effect control board 12 that the small hit gaming state is ended, and it can be specified to control the effect state corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state. After that, it waits until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the effect operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by the effect electric parts such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and the game effect lamp 9. Processing to perform is performed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 prior to the small hit gaming state may be continued without changing the setting of the probability change flag and the short time flag.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 47, the CPU 103 first sums the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number based on, for example, the total reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. It is determined whether or not the total pending storage number as a value is “0” (step S241). At this time, if the total reserved storage number is other than “0” (step S241; No), the start data is read from the start data storage unit 151C (step S242). At this time, the start data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the start data storage unit 151C may be read.

  Following the processing of step S242, for example, by subtracting 1 from the total reserved storage number count value, the total reserved storage number is updated to be decremented by 1, and the start data storage unit 151C uses the hold number “1”. The storage contents of the start data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “8”) are shifted upward by one entry (step S243). Then, it is determined whether the start data read in step S242 is “first” or “second” (step S244).

  If it is determined in step S244 that the start data is “first” (step S244; first), a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. In response to the establishment of the 1 start condition, the variable special figure designation buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” (step S245). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S244 that the start data is “second” (step S244; second), a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. In response to the establishment of the second start condition, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” (step S246).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S245 and S246, the hold data is read from the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start-up data read in step S242 (step S247). For example, when the start data is “first”, as the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a random value for determining the special figure display result The numerical data indicating MR1 and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are respectively read out. On the other hand, when the start data is “second”, the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B is used for determining the special figure display result. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are respectively read out.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S247, the pending storage number count value corresponding to the start data is decremented by 1 and the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the hold number “ The stored contents of the pending data stored in the entries corresponding to “2” to “8” are shifted up by one entry (step S248). For example, when the start data is “first”, the first reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the stored content of the held data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A is shifted upward by one entry. Let On the other hand, when the start data is “second”, the second reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the stored contents of the reserved data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B are stored one entry at a time. Shift to the top.

  Following the processing of step S248, a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the start data is used as a use table for determining whether the variable display result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lack”. Select and set (step S249). For example, if the start data is “first”, the first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 8A is set as the use table, while if the start data is “second”, FIG. The second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in B) is set as a use table. The CPU 103 refers to the special figure display result determination table set in this way, so that the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result read in step S247 is the variable display result of “big hit”. Whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” is determined according to whether or not it matches any of the determined values assigned to (step S250).

  When it is determined in step S250 that the variable display result is “big hit” (step S250; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S251). ). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 9 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S252). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2 read in step S247, the jackpot type is set to “normal” or “probable change” by referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in step S252. ”Or“ Sudden Probability ”is determined as one of the big hit types (step S253). When the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S246, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise” in the big hit type determining table 131. As a result, the jackpot type is not determined to be “accurate”. Corresponding to the big hit type determined in this way, for example, by updating the value of the big hit type buffer (hit type buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, the determined big hit type is stored (step S254). As an example, if the big hit type is “normal”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “0”, “probable change” is set to “1”, and “surprise” is set to “2”.

  If it is not determined in step S250 that the variable display result is “big hit” (step S250; No), the special figure display result determination table set in step S249 is referred to, thereby determining the step. Variable depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read in S247 matches any of the determined values assigned to the variable display result of “small hit” It is determined whether or not the display result is “small hit” (step S255). When the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S246, the special figure display result for the variable display result “small hit” in the second special figure display result determination table 130B. Since the random number value MR1 for determination is not assigned, the variable display result is not determined as “small hit”. When it is determined in step S255 that the variable display result is “small hit” (step S255; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 151 is set to an on state ( Step S256).

  After executing either of the processes of steps S254 and S256, or when it is determined in step S255 that the variable display result is not “small hit” (step S255; No), the big hit gaming state or small A determined special symbol is set in accordance with the result of prior determination as to whether or not to control the winning game state, and further, the determination result of the jackpot type when the jackpot gaming state is set (step S257). As an example, when it is determined in step S255 that the variable display result is not “small hit”, a lost pattern is obtained corresponding to the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “lost”. The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S250 that the variable display result is “big hit”, “1”, “3”, which are big hit symbols, according to the big hit type determination result in step S253. , One of the special symbols indicating the number “7” is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “normal”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that is the normal jackpot symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “probability change”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability change big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “surprise”, the special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the two round big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. When it is determined in step S255 that the variable display result is “small hit”, the special symbol indicating the number “5” as the small hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S257, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S258), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . If the total number of reserved memories is “0” in step S241 (step S241; Yes), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step S259), and the special symbol normal process is terminated.

  48 and 49 are flowcharts showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In this variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first sets a special game remaining number count value, which is a value of a special game remaining number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example, to a predetermined specific period determination value (for example, [10] etc.) (step S261). Subsequently, based on the comparison result in step S261, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a special gaming state such as a probability variation state or a short time state, it is determined whether it is within a specific period or outside the period. (Step S262). As an example, the CPU 103 may determine that the special game remaining number count value is greater than “0” and is equal to or less than the specific period determination value and is within the specific period. Based on the determination result at this time, for example, a predetermined flag (for example, a specific period determination flag) provided in the game control flag setting unit 151 or a value (for example, a specific buffer) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 By updating a period determination buffer value or the like, it may be possible to store whether it is within a specific period or outside a specific period.

  Thereafter, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S263). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S263; Yes), based on the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the determination result in step S262, according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. As a use table for determining one of a plurality of types, one of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132E is selected and set (step S264). Here, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified from the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the gaming control flag setting unit 152.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S263 (step S263; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S265). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S265; Yes), based on the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. One of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected and set as a use table for determination (step S266).

  When the small hit flag is OFF in step S265 (step S265; No), based on the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the determination result in step S262, the table selection setting shown in FIG. Then, one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134E is selected and set as a use table for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state (step S267). At this time, for example, the total reserved memory number is specified by reading the total reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S268). Subsequently, a random value MR2-2 for reach determination is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S269). Then, based on the reach determination random value MR2-2 extracted in step S269, the presence or absence of the reach state is determined by referring to any of the reach determination tables 134A to 134E selected in step S267 (step S267). S270).

  Following the processing in step S270, it is determined whether the determination result in step S270 is the variable display mode “reach” or “non-reach” (step S271). At this time, if the determination result is “reach” as the variable display mode (step S271; reach), the table shown in FIG. 14F is based on the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the determination result in step S262. According to the selection setting, one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135E is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types (step S272). On the other hand, if the determination result is “non-reach” as the variable display mode (step S267; non-reach), the table selection setting shown in FIG. 15D is based on the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Accordingly, any one of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types (step S273).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S264, S266, S272, and S273, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S274). ). Then, based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S274, by referring to the use table set in any one of steps S264, S266, S272, and S273, the variation pattern types are classified into a plurality of types. Either one is determined (step S275). If any of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132E is selected and set in step S264, the big hit type is determined based on, for example, the big hit type buffer value when executing the processing of step S275. It is only necessary to specify whether “normal”, “probability change”, or “surprising accuracy” is determined, and to determine the variation pattern type according to the specified jackpot type.

  Here, in the processes of steps S274 and S275, the decorative symbol variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A using the first special symbol when the first start condition is satisfied. Whether to determine the type, or to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied Regardless, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing of steps S274 and S275, regardless of the determination result of the presence / absence of the reach display state in step S270, numerical data indicating the common random number value MR3 used for determining the variation pattern type is used to perform the processing by a common processing module. The variation pattern type can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S275, the variation pattern type may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 101 set in the determination table pointer.

  After the variation pattern type is determined in step S275 in this way, as a use table for determining the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type or the determination result in step S262, The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 or the loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B shown in FIGS. 18 and 19 are selected and set (step S276). Subsequently, a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S277). Then, based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern extracted in step S277, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S276 (step S278). .

  Here, in the processes of steps S277 and S278, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A using the first special symbol when the first starting condition is satisfied. Whether or not the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied Instead, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing of steps S277 and S278, the numerical data indicating the common random number value MR4 used for determining the variation pattern is used to change by the common processing module regardless of the determination result of the presence / absence of the reach display state in step S270. The pattern can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S278, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to the determination table stored in the address of the ROM 101 set in the determination table pointer.

  Following the determination of the variation pattern in step S278, a special diagram variation time that is a variable symbol display time corresponding to the variation pattern determination result is set (step S279). Thereafter, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The setting for starting the variable display of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the above (step S280). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  After executing the process of step S280, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the special symbol variable display (step S281 in FIG. 49). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sequentially issues a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to transmit, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is designated by a transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 Stored in the designated buffer area. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sequentially issues a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to transmit, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. When the setting in step S281 is performed, each time the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. The first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, and the variable display result notification command are sequentially transmitted.

  Subsequent to the setting in step S281, a process for determining whether or not to end the special game state such as the probability change state or the short time state is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the special game remaining number count value is larger than “0” (step S282). At this time, if the special game remaining number count value is larger than “0”, it is determined that the special figure game can be executed in the special game state, and the special game remaining number count value is decremented by one. It updates so as to do (step S283). Then, it is determined whether or not the special game remaining count value after the update in step S283 has become “0” (step S284). Here, if the special game remaining number count value becomes “0” (step S284; Yes), it is determined that the special game state such as the probability change state or the time reduction state is ended, and the probability change flag or the time reduction flag is cleared and turned off. (Step S285).

  If the special game remaining number count value is not larger than “0” in step S282 (step S282; No), it is determined that the special game state is not controlled, and the processes of steps S283 to S285 are performed. skip. If the special game remaining number count value is not “0” in step S284 (step S284; No), the special game state that can be executed in the special game state remains, so that the special game state is changed. It is determined not to end, and the process of step S285 is skipped. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S286), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated. Note that the process for determining whether or not to end the special game state such as the probability change state or the short time state, such as the processes in steps S282 to S285, is not limited to that executed in the variation pattern setting process. It may be executed in the special symbol stop process in step S113 shown in FIG. That is, the process for determining whether or not to end the special game state may be executed when the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game is started, or when the variation of the special symbol is terminated. May be.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 50, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S291). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S291; Yes), the big hit start production waiting time is set (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the jackpot start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S292, setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit type buffer value is transmitted in the transmission command buffer. It may be stored in the buffer area specified by the pointer. Thereby, when the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 44 is executed after the special symbol stop process is finished, the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit type from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is executed. Is sent. After the setting in step S293, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S294). Also, settings are made to end the probability variation state and the time reduction state. For example, the CPU 103 clears the probability variation flag to turn off (step S295), clears the time reduction flag to turn off (step S296), and clears the special game remaining number counter. A process of initializing the count value to “0” (step S297) is executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S298), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S291 (step S291; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S299). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S299; Yes), a small hit start time production waiting time is set (step S300). For example, in step S300, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the small hitting start production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S300, setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S301). For example, in the process of step S301, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command corresponding to the variable display result “small hit” is the transmission command. What is necessary is just to store in the buffer area | region designated with the transmission command pointer in the buffer. Thereby, when the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 44 is executed after the special symbol stop process is completed, the variable display result is “small hit” from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A corresponding hit start designation command is transmitted. After the setting in step S301, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S302). The special symbol process flag value is updated to “8”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit pre-release processing (step S303), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

  If the small hit flag is off in step S299 (step S299; No), the special symbol process flag value is updated to “0” (step S304), and the special symbol stop process is terminated. In the special symbol stop process, when executing a process for determining whether or not to end a special game state such as a probability change state or a time-short state such as the processes in steps S282 to S285 shown in FIG. If it is determined in step S291 that the big hit flag is off, or after executing one of the processes in steps S303 and S304, the process corresponding to the processes in steps S282 to S285 is executed. Good.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 51, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot end time effect waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the post-opening of the big prize opening in step S116 shown in FIG. A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and depending on whether or not the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value. What is necessary is just to determine whether the production waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S311 (step S311; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end stage waiting time has elapsed in step S311 (step S311; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S312). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type buffer value read in step S312 is “0” corresponding to the “normal” jackpot type (step S313). At this time, if the big hit type buffer value is “0” (step S313; Yes), the setting for starting the control to the short time state is performed. As an example, the CPU 103 sets the time reduction flag to the on state (step S314), and count initial value (for example, “100”) determined in advance corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time reduction state. Is set in the special game remaining number counter (step S315).

  When the big hit type buffer value is other than “0” in step S313 (step S313; No), setting for starting control to the probability variation state is performed. As an example, the CPU 103 executes a process for setting the probability variation flag to the on state (step S316) and a process for setting the time reduction flag to the on state (step S317), and then can be executed in the probability variation state. A predetermined count initial value (eg, “70”) corresponding to the upper limit value is set in the special game remaining number counter (step S318). The upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the probability variation state may be the same numerical value as the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the short-time state, or may be a different numerical value.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S315 and S318, the special process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S319), and then the jackpot end process is terminated.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process executed in step S16 of FIG. In this normal symbol process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 provided in the passage gate 41 is in an on state, so that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. It is determined whether or not (step S131). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is turned on (step S131; Yes), the process at the time of passing the gate is executed (step S132). On the other hand, when the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is in the OFF state (step S131; No), the process of step S132 is skipped.

  As an example of the process at the time of passing through the gate executed in step S132, the following process is executed. That is, first, whether or not the number of pending map storages, which is the number of pending data stored in the pending map storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). Determine whether. At this time, if the number of stored customary drawings is an upper limit value, the current game ball detection is invalidated and the process at the time of passing the gate is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the number of stored ordinary maps is less than the upper limit value, for example, the CPU 103 indicates a random number value MR5 for determining a displayed diagram result from numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter. Extract numerical data. Then, the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value MR5 is set as the hold data at the head of the empty entry in the usual hold storage unit. After the above-described processing at the time of passing the gate, or after it is determined in step S131 that the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is in the OFF state, the following processing is performed according to the value of the usual process flag. Each process of steps S140 to S144 is executed.

  The normal symbol normal process in step S140 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In this normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display device 20 starts the normal symbol game based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the normal symbol storage unit. At this time, for example, if there is pending data stored in the usual figure hold storage unit, the value of the usual figure process flag is updated to “1”.

  The normal symbol determination process in step S141 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol determination process, based on numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the normal symbol display result, the normal symbol display result determination table 130C shown in FIG. A determination is made as to whether or not the ordinary map display result as the variable display result is “per ordinary map” or “fusual map loss”. Here, in the ordinary map display result determination table 130C, when the hourly flag is on, the ratio of the decision to make the ordinary figure display result “per ordinary figure” is higher than when the hourly flag is off. In this way, a decision value to be compared with the random value MR5 is assigned to the usual map display result. Thereby, in the special game state such as the probability change state and the short time state, the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal game is more likely to be “per normal game” than in the normal state, thereby forming the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. The second start winning opening is likely to be in an expanded and open state, and the game ball is likely to enter the second starting winning opening (start winning prize). Further, in the normal symbol determination process, the universal symbol change time corresponding to the universal symbol display result is also determined. Here, in the common figure display result determination table 130C, when the time reduction flag is on, the normal figure change time is set to be shorter than when the time reduction flag is off. As a result, in the special game state such as the probability variation state and the short time state, the interval for deriving and displaying the normal symbol variable display result in the regular game is shortened, and the variable display result of “per regular diagram” is derived and displayed. The interval is also shortened, and the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is likely to be in an expanded open state, and the game ball is likely to enter the second starting winning opening (start winning prize). Further, in the normal symbol determination process, when the normal symbol display result is “per normal symbol”, a tilt control time, which is a time during which the second start winning prize opening is in the expanded open state, may be set. Here, in the normal map display result determination table 130C, the tilt control time is set to be longer when the time reduction flag is on than when the time reduction flag is off. Thereby, in the special game state such as the probability change state or the short time state, the time for the second start winning opening to be in the expanded open state becomes longer, so that the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening (start winning prize). Alternatively, when the time reduction flag is on, by setting so that the number of times of tilt control is increased when the variable display result is “per normal” than when the time reduction flag is off, In a special game state such as a probable change state or a short time state, the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is likely to be in an expanded open state, so that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening (start winning prize). Also good. The setting related to the tilt control may be performed in the normal symbol stop process in step S143 or the normal electric accessory operation process in step S144.

  The normal symbol variation process in step S142 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol variation process, a setting for varying the normal symbol is performed in the general symbol game by the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol that changes based on these settings is displayed as a normal symbol display result that is a variable symbol display result of the normal symbol when the normal symbol stop process in step S143 is executed. In the normal symbol variation process, the elapsed time from the start of variation of the normal symbol is measured. At this time, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the normal time fluctuation time. Then, when the usual figure change time is reached, the value of the usual figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The normal symbol stop process in step S143 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “3”. In this normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol display 20 is set to stop and display the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol. Note that the setting for stopping and displaying the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is the value of the normal symbol process flag when the measured elapsed time reaches the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol variation process of step S142. It may be performed before updating to “3”. Further, in the normal symbol stop process, when the normal symbol display result is “per normal symbol”, for example, the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory connected to the movable wing piece included in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B is driven. After the setting for tilting control with the movable blade piece as the tilting position, such as the setting of the normal electric operation pattern, is performed, the value of the normal process flag is updated to “4”. As described above, when the normal power operation pattern is set in the normal symbol stop process in step S142, if the time reduction flag is OFF at the time of setting, the normal power is set to the tilt control time TK1 shown in FIG. 8C. While the operation pattern is selected, if the time reduction flag is ON at the time of setting, the normal operation pattern for the tilt control time TK2 shown in FIG. 8C may be selected. Thus, when the normal symbol variable display is started, the hourly flag is OFF corresponding to, for example, the big hit gaming state, but when the normal symbol variable display result is stopped, the big hit gaming state is displayed. If the hourly flag is turned on in response to a time-short state after the end, the second start prize opening in response to the fact that the normal map display result is “per-time” in the time-short state. The tilt control time can be lengthened. As a result, since the normal symbol variable display started before the time-shortening state, the game ball enters the second start winning opening even if the normal-circuit display result becomes “per-normal” after the time-shortening state. It can prevent that it becomes hard. If the normal map display result is “general map loss”, the value of the general map process flag is updated to “0”.

  The ordinary electric accessory actuating process of step S144 is executed when the value of the normal process flag is “4”. In this ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the movable wing piece provided in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B is moved from the vertical position to the tilt position in response to the variable display result in the ordinary game being “per game”. Thus, the tilt control setting for changing the second start winning opening from the normal open state to the expanded open state is performed. For example, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, a drive control signal for driving the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is generated according to the setting of the ordinary electric action pattern set in the ordinary symbol stopping process in step S143. Can be done. Further, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the elapsed time after the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is driven and the second start winning opening is set in the open state is measured, and the elapsed time corresponds to the ordinary electric actuating pattern. It is determined whether or not the tilt control time has been reached. When the elapsed time reaches the tilt control time, the driving of the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is stopped and the movable blade piece is returned from the tilt position to the vertical position, thereby expanding the second start winning opening. Set to change from the open state to the normal open state. At this time, the value of the normal process flag may be updated to “0”.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 53 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, a random number update process is executed (step S402), and numerical data indicating a random value counted by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 among various random values used for effect control is displayed by software. Update. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S403). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is off in step S403 (step S403; No), the process returns to step S402. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on in step S403 (step S403; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S404), and command analysis processing is executed (step S405). . In the command analysis process executed in step S405, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S405, an effect control process is executed (step S406). In this effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation on the display screen of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and a movable member such as an effect movable member. About the control content of the rendering operation using the electrical components for rendering such as the driving operation in, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S406 of FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the following processes in steps S160 to S166 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example. Run.

  The fluctuation start command reception waiting process in step S160 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In this variation start command reception waiting process, the image display device 5 is changed depending on whether one of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is received as the variation start command transmitted from the main board 11. Includes a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. . At this time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” in response to the determination to start variable display.

  The decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this decorative symbol variation setting process, the start of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the start of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform various production operations including variable display of decorative symbols, the final decorative symbol, temporary stop symbol, notice pattern, etc., which will be the final stop symbol, depending on the variation pattern and variable display result, etc. Processing to determine is included. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, a symbol variation control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, and the like are set based on these determination results. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The decorative symbol variation process in step S162 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the decorative symbol variation processing, various types of symbol variation control patterns, warning effect control patterns, and the like corresponding to the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 are used. Processing for reading out the control data and performing various effects control during variable display of the decorative design is included. After performing such effect control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the symbol variation control pattern, or when a decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Correspondingly, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped manner. When the final decorative design is displayed in response to the end code being read from the design variation control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. In addition, even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative pattern on the production control board 12 side. When the finalized decorative symbol is displayed as a complete stop, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The decorative symbol variation end process in step S163 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The decorative symbol variation end process includes a process of determining whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. At this time, if it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to “4” when the variable display result specified from the hit start designation command is “big hit”. When the variable display result specified from the hit start designation command is “small hit”, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the hit start designation command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the variable display result being “lost”.

  The big hit control effect process in step S164 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the effect processing during the big hit control, for example, various effect control patterns corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” or the like is set, and the effect image based on the set contents is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Displaying or outputting sound or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and game effect lamps by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 9 and processing for controlling various effects in the big hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the decoration LED. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The effect process during small hit control in step S165 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In the effect processing during the small hit control, for example, various effect control patterns corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “small hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the image display device 5. Displaying in the area, outputting sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the sound control board 13, and playing games by outputting commands (lighting signals) to the lamp control board 14 Processing for controlling various effect operations in the small hit gaming state such as turning on / off / flashing the effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED is included. As an example, in the effect process during small hit control in step S165, the effect control patterns of the hit start CST2-2 and the hit control CRE1-2 shown in FIG. Reading from the pattern table 182 and setting the production control process timer. Thereafter, various settings for controlling the rendering operation may be performed in accordance with the control data read from the rendering control pattern according to the rendering control process timer value. The effect operation executed by such a setting may be an effect operation common to both the accuracy and the small hit, which may be executed even when the big hit type is “Accuracy”. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process in step S166 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this ending effect process, various effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state are set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14, the game effect lamp 9 and Processing for controlling various effect operations corresponding to the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, such as turning on / off / flashing the decoration LED, is included. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the end of the effect operation.

  FIG.55 and FIG.56 is a flowchart which shows an example of the decoration symbol fluctuation | variation setting process performed in step S161 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display result is “losing” by, for example, reading the EXT data of the variable display result notification command (FIG. 55). Step S501). At this time, if the variable display result is “losing” (step S501; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data of the variation pattern designation command, the designated variation pattern sets the variable display mode of the decorative symbol to “non-reach”. It is determined whether or not it is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case of "" (step S502).

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step S502; Yes), the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern that executes a specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye”. It is determined whether or not (step S503). As an example, if it is determined in step S502 that the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, if the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-7 (see FIG. 6), “ It is determined that the variation pattern is to execute a specific effect of “end of development opportunity”.

  When it is determined in step S503 that the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect of “end of development chance eyes” (step S503; Yes), the final stop symbol constituting any of the development chance eyes HC1 to HC8 and A combination of determined decorative symbols is determined (step S504). As an example, in the process of step S504, the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 22D is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1- 5, The combination of FZ1-6 is determined as a definitive decorative symbol.

  If it is determined in step S503 that the pattern is not a variation pattern that executes the specific effect of “end of development chance” (step S503; No), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination Is determined (step S505). As an example, in the process of step S505, first, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 22A is selected and set. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 22B is selected and set. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-2, the decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. At this time, based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, by referring to the left / right output determination table 161 as shown in FIG. It is determined which of a plurality of types. Thereafter, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 22C is selected and set. Subsequently, a random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the extracted random number value SR1-3 and the left / right outcome type DC1-1, the final stop symbol determination table 160C is referred to determine a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  In this way, in the process of step S505, with reference to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161, the decorative symbols to be the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are determined. Then, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols is a reach combination or a jackpot combination, or any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8, any of the development chances HC1 to HC8, any of the chances of chance TC1 to TC4, There is no predetermined non-reach combination as shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; No), a combination of confirmed decorative symbols that is a final stop symbol constituting a reach-losing combination is determined (step S506). As an example, in the process of step S506, first, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 25A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the same decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 are displayed. decide. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 25B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-3, the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1, according to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, The symbol difference between the decorative symbol to be FZ2-2 and the decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined in this way, a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined.

  Thus, in the process of step S506, first, using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, “left” and “right” other than the “middle” ornament symbol display area 5C where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last. The decorative symbols to be the left and right final stopped symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are determined. After that, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the decorative symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2- in the “medium” ornament symbol display area 5C where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last. 1, the design difference with the decorative design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the decorative design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference.

  If the variable display result is other than “losing” in step S501 (step S501; No), the variable display result is “small hit” or the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is It is determined whether it is one of the “surprise” or other (step S507 in FIG. 56). At this time, when the variable display result is “small hit”, or when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” (step S507; Yes), for example, the change pattern designation command By reading the EXT data or the like, it is determined whether the specified variation pattern is one of the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 or any other variation (step S508). Here, as shown in FIG. 7, all the variation patterns of the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-4 specify that the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is “non-reach”. Therefore, if it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is any of the special PG 1-1 to special PG 1-4 (step S508; Yes), the process proceeds to step S503 shown in FIG. 55, and step S504 is performed. The final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is determined by one of the processes of S505. If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is one of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4, it is designated by a variation pattern designation command in step S503 shown in FIG. If the variation pattern is the variation pattern of the special PG1-4 (see FIG. 7), it is determined that the variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye”.

  If it is determined in step S508 in FIG. 56 that the variation pattern is other than the variation pattern of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 (step S508; No), the designated variation pattern is special PG2-1 to special PG2-. It is determined whether it is any of the three fluctuation patterns or any other pattern (step S509). Here, as shown in FIG. 7, each of the variation patterns of the special PG2-1 to the special PG2-3 designates that the “normal” reach effect is performed after the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state. ing. Therefore, if it is determined in step S509 that the variation pattern is any of the special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 (step S509; Yes), the process proceeds to step S506 shown in FIG. The final decorative symbol that constitutes the final stop symbol is determined.

  If it is determined in step S509 of FIG. 56 that the variation pattern is not the variation pattern of special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 (step S509; No), the designated variation pattern is special PG3-1 to special PG3-. One of the three variation patterns. Here, as shown in FIG. 7, all of the variation patterns of the special PG 3-1 to the special PG 3-3, the combination of the fixed decorative pattern resulting in the variable display result of the decorative pattern is selected from any one of the chance chance items TC 1 to TC 4. It is specified to do. Corresponding to the designation of any one of the special PG3-1 to special PG3-3 variation patterns, the combination of the finalized decorative symbols to be the final stop symbols constituting any of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is determined. (Step S510). As an example, in the process of step S510, the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 26C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1 and FZ4- that become any one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4 are obtained. 2, The combination of FZ4-3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  In step S507, when the variable display result is not “small hit” and the big hit type is not “surprise” (step S507; No), a use table for determining whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit is executed. As shown in FIG. 27B, the jackpot promotion promotion determination table 164B shown in FIG. 27B is selected and set (step S511). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR5-2 for determining the execution of the big hit promotion effect is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S512). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR5-2, the presence / absence of jackpot promotion is determined by referring to the jackpot promotion promotion determination table 164B (step S513).

  Following the processing of step S513, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S513 is “no promotion effect” that does not execute the jackpot promotion effect (step S514). At this time, if it is a determination result of “with promotion effect” as “promotion success” or “promotion failure” (step S514; No), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the normal jackpot combination is selected. Determination is made (step S515). As an example, in the process of step S515, the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 26A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which are any of the normal jackpot combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern. In this way, when the jackpot promotion effect is executed, the final stop symbol constituting the normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the decorative symbol, and the derivation display of the final stop symbol constituting the probability variable jackpot combination is prevented. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player or the like from feeling uncomfortable because the promotion effect during the big hit is executed even though the final stop symbol constituting the probability variation big hit combination is derived and displayed.

  If the determination result is “no promotion effect” in step S514 (step S514; Yes), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbol constituting the probability variation jackpot combination is determined (step S516). Here, in the setting of the jackpot promotion promotion execution execution determination table 164B shown in FIG. 27B, in response to the determination that the jackpot promotion promotion execution is not executed in response to the fact that the jackpot type is “probability change” When a determined value to be compared with the random number SR5-2 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned and the jackpot type is “normal”, the determination value indicates that the promotion effect during the jackpot promotion is not executed is determined. Not assigned. Therefore, the determination result of “no promotion effect” is obtained only when the jackpot type is “probability change”. As an example, in the process of step S516, the final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 26B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163B on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which become one of the probable big hit combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  After performing any of the processes of steps S504 to S506 shown in FIG. 55 or after executing any of the processes of steps S510, S515, and S516 shown in FIG. 56, the specific effect setting process is executed (FIG. 55, step S517). FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the specific effect setting process executed in step S517. In the specific effect setting process shown in FIG. 57, first, the effect control CPU 120 uses a change pattern (for example, non-reach PA1-4 or normal) in which the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command executes a specific effect of “slip”. (PA2-2, super PA3-2, etc.) is determined (step S701).

  When it is determined in step S701 that the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect of “slip” (step S701; Yes), as a table for determining one of a plurality of slip patterns as a use pattern, FIG. The slip pattern determination table 166 shown in FIG. 29 is selected and set (step S702). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR6-1 for determining the slip pattern is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S703). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR6-1, the slip pattern is determined as one of the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4 by referring to the slip pattern determination table 166 (step S704).

  After the slip pattern is determined in step S704, according to the determined slip pattern, a slip temporary stop pattern is determined as a decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped when a specific effect of “slip” is executed. (Step S705), the specific effect setting process is terminated. For example, in the process of step S705, corresponding to the slip pattern determined in step S704, any one of the temporary stop symbol determination tables 168A to 168D at the time of slip shown in FIGS. 31 (A) to (D) is used. Select as and set. That is, when the slip pattern of the slip TP1-1 is determined, the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 168A is selected. When the slip pattern of the slip TP1-2 is determined, the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 168B is selected. Is selected, the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 168C is selected. If the slip TP1-4 slip pattern is determined, the slip temporary stop symbol determination is performed. Select table 168D. Further, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to any of the selected slip temporary stop symbol determination tables 168A to 168D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR3, the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1 and the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2. , A decorative symbol which is either the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-3 or the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-4 is determined.

  If it is determined in step S701 that the variation pattern does not execute the specific effect of “slip” (step S701; No), the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the specific effect of “main notice”. It is determined whether or not it is a variation pattern (for example, non-reach PA 1-6, super PA 3-3, super PA 4-3, etc.) (step S706).

  When it is determined in step S706 that the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect of “main notice” (step S706; Yes), as a table for determining one of a plurality of main notice patterns as a use pattern. The main notice pattern determination table 167 shown in FIG. 30 is selected and set (step S707). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR6-2 for determining the main notice pattern is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S708). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6-2, the main notice pattern is determined as one of the main notice TP2-1 to the main notice TP2-3 by referring to the main notice pattern determination table 167 ( Step S709). At this time, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the previous effect buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is read. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the main notice pattern different from the previously decided main notice pattern is determined by referring to the table data corresponding to the read last effect buffer value. Can do.

  After the main notice pattern is determined in step S709, the previous effect buffer in the main notice pattern determination table 167 depends on whether the determined main notice pattern is the main notice TP2-1 to the main notice TP2-3. After updating the last effect buffer value by the update setting value (step S710), the specific effect setting process is terminated. For example, when the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP2-1 is determined in step S709, the previous effect buffer value is updated to “1”. On the other hand, if the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP2-2 is determined in step S709, the previous effect buffer value is updated to “2”. When the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP2-3 is determined in step S709, the previous effect buffer value is updated to “3”.

  By executing the processing of step S710 in this way, the main notice TP2-1 to main notice TP2-3 prepared for each type of effect operation corresponding to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect of “main notice” is displayed. Each time it is determined to be one of the notice patterns, the previous effect buffer value corresponding to the main notice pattern of the decided main notice TP2-1 to main notice TP2-3 can be updated. That is, each time the effect operation in the specific effect of the “main notice” is determined as one of a plurality of types, the determined effect operation type can be stored as the previous effect buffer value in an updatable manner. In the process of step S709, when the fluctuation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the previous notice buffer value is read and the main notice pattern is determined using the main notice pattern determination table 167 as shown in FIG. Thus, the main notice pattern can be determined so as not to execute the same type of effect operation as the type of effect operation stored as the previous effect buffer value.

  When it is determined in step S706 that the variation pattern does not execute the specific effect of “main notice” (step S706; No), the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command identifies the “pseudo-continuous”. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern (eg, non-reach PA 1-5, super PA 3-4, super PB 3-4, etc.) is executed (step S711). At this time, if the variation pattern is to execute a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” (step S711; Yes), the pseudo-continuous as a decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped and displayed when the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed. After determining the temporary stop symbol (step S712), the specific effect setting process is terminated.

  As an example, in the process of step S712, first, the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation specified from the received variation pattern designation command or the like is set to a constant M. At this time, when the number of re-variations (not including the initial variation) in the variable display effect of the “pseudo train” is one variation pattern, the constant M is set to “1” and the number of re-variations is two. If it is a variation pattern, the constant M is set to “2”, and if the number of re-variations is three, the constant M is set to “3”. Subsequently, “0” is set to a variable N indicating the number of combinations of temporarily stopped symbols that have been determined. If the fluctuation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination table 169A shown in FIG. 32A is selected as the use table, and the fluctuation patterns are super PA3-4, super PA3-3. 32, if it is any one of Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PA5-4, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Special PG1-3, FIG. The quasi-continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 169B shown in FIG. Thereafter, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-1, by referring to any of the selected pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination tables 169A and 169B, the left that becomes one of the pseudo continuous chance eyes GC1 to GC8 The combination of the middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. At this time, the variable N is updated by adding 1, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M, the process of step S712 is terminated and the specific effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the effect control CPU 120 selects the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 169C shown in FIG. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 169C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR4-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ3 that becomes one of the pseudo continuous chance eyes GC1 to GC8. -1, KZ3-2 and KZ3-3 are determined. At this time, the variable N is updated by adding 1, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M, the process of step S712 is terminated and the specific effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the effect control CPU 120 selects the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination table 169D shown in FIG. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 169D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-3, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ4 that becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chance eyes GC1 to GC8. -1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3 are determined. At this time, the variable N is incremented by 1 and updated so that the updated variable N matches the constant M. Therefore, the process of step S712 is terminated and the specific effect setting process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S711 that the variation pattern does not execute the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect (step S711; No), the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is “the development chance”. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern (for example, super PB 3-5, super PC 4-1, etc.) is executed (step S713). At this time, if the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect of “Development Chance Eye” (step S713; Yes), it is displayed as a decorative pattern that is temporarily displayed when the “Development Chance Eye” specific effect is executed. After determining the development chance temporary stop symbol (step S714), the specific effect setting process is terminated.

  As an example, in the process of step S714, the development chance temporary stop symbol determination table 170 shown in FIG. 34 is selected and set as a use table. Further, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the selected development chance temporary stop symbol determination table 170 based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR3, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ6 that becomes one of the development chance eyes HC1 to HC8. -1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3 are determined.

  After executing the specific effect setting process as described above at step S517 shown in FIG. 55, the changing promotion effect setting process is executed (step S518). FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing promotion effect setting process executed in step S518. In the changing promotion effect setting process shown in FIG. 58, the effect control CPU 120 first determines that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise”, that is, the big hit type is “normal”. ”Or“ probability change ”, or it is determined whether or not it is applicable (step S721). At this time, if the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable variation” (step S721; No), the changing promotion effect setting processing is ended as it is. .

  When it is determined in step S721 that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change” (step S721; Yes), FIG. The changing promotion effect determination table 164A shown is selected and set as a use table (step S722). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR5-1 for determining the promotion promotion execution during fluctuation is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S723). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5-1 extracted in step S723, the jackpot type is “normal” and “probability” by referring to the changing promotion promotion determination table 164A set in step S722. The presence / absence of a promotion effect during change is determined according to which one is selected (step S724). At this time, if the determination result is “no promotion effect” that does not execute the changing promotion effect (step S725; No), the changing promotion effect setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the case of a determination result of “with promotion effect” that executes the changing promotion effect in step S725 (step S725; Yes), as a decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the changing promotion effect. After determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the promotion effect (step S726), the changing promotion effect setting process during the end is finished. In the process of step S726, as an example, the promotion effect temporary stop symbol determination table 165 shown in FIG. 28 is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the promotion effect is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. And based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR2, the temporary stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are determined by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 165 during the promotion effect. In accordance with the symbol number of the decorative symbol, the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 that constitute the big hit combination (normal big hit combination) consisting of the same normal symbols is determined.

  After executing the changing promotion effect setting process as described above in step S518 shown in FIG. 55, the sub-notice setting process is executed (step S519). FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-notice setting process executed in step S519. In the sub notice setting processing shown in FIG. 59, the effect control CPU 120 first selects and sets the sub notice pattern type determination table 171 shown in FIG. 35 as a use table (step S741). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR7 for determining the sub-notice pattern type is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S742). Then, by referring to the sub-notice pattern type determination table 171 based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR7 extracted in step S742, there is no notice or sub notice of the notices CY1 to CY3 according to the variation pattern. One of the pattern types is determined (step S743). At this time, if it is determined that there is no notice (step S744; Yes), the sub notice setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S743 that any of the sub-notice pattern types of notice CY1 to notice CY3 (step S744; No), the sub-notice pattern determination shown in FIG. 36 is determined according to the determined sub-notice pattern type. Any one of the table 172A, the sub notice pattern determination table 172B shown in FIG. 37, and the sub notice pattern determination table 172C shown in FIG. 38 is selected and set as a use table (step S745). That is, if it is determined in step S743 that the sub-notice pattern type of the notice CY1 is determined, the sub-notice pattern determination table 172A is set, and if it is determined as the sub-notice pattern type of the notice CY2, the sub-notice pattern determination table 172B Is set, and if the sub-notice pattern type of the notice CY3 is determined, the sub-notice pattern determination table 172C is set. Thereafter, the sub notice pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S746), and the sub notice setting process is terminated.

  In the process of step S746, for example, when the sub-notice pattern type is determined to be the sub-notice pattern CY1, a random value for determining the first sub-notice pattern is obtained from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Numerical data indicating SR8-1 is extracted. Then, by referring to the sub notice pattern determination table 172A set in step S745 based on the extracted numerical data indicating the random number SR8-1, there is no sub notice or sub notice YP1-1 to sub notice YP1-. One of the four sub-notice patterns is determined. At this time, according to the setting in the sub-notice pattern determination table 172A shown in FIG. 36, there is no sub-notice or sub-notice YP1-1 to sub-notice YP1- The ratio determined for each of the four sub-notice patterns can be varied. On the side of the effect control board 12, for example, a counter similar to the special game remaining number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. 20 is provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. The effect control CPU 120 may be able to determine whether it is within the specific period or outside the specific period. Alternatively, an effect control command indicating the determination result in the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 48 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, so that the effect control board 12 is within a specific period. It may be possible to specify whether it is out of period.

  As another example, when the sub-notice pattern type is determined to be the sub-notice CY2, the random value SR8-2 for determining the second sub-notice pattern is determined from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. The numerical data indicating is extracted. Then, by referring to the sub notice pattern determination table 172B set in step S745 based on the extracted numerical data indicating the random value SR8-2, no sub notice or sub notice YP2-1 to sub notice YP2- One of the four sub-notice patterns is determined.

  As yet another example, when the sub-notice pattern type is determined to be the sub-notice pattern CY3, a random value SR8- for determining the third sub-notice pattern is determined from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Numerical data indicating 3 is extracted. Then, by referring to the sub notice pattern determination table 172C set in step S745 based on the extracted numerical data indicating the random value SR8-3, no sub notice or sub notice YP3-1 to sub notice YP3- One of the three sub-notice patterns is determined.

  After executing the notice effect setting process as described above in step S519 shown in FIG. 55, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S520). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to, for example, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the slip pattern determined in step S704 shown in FIG. 57, the main notice pattern determined in step S709, and the like. Thus, one of a plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 39 is selected and set as a use pattern. For example, in response to the sub-notice pattern determined in step S746 shown in FIG. 59, any one of a plurality of types of notice effect control patterns stored in the notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. Select as and set. Here, in the effect control pattern tables 185A and 185B shown in FIG. 42A, the one that reads the effect control pattern is switched depending on whether it is within or outside the specific period. Good. In this way, by changing the effect control pattern to be read as the usage pattern depending on whether it is within or outside the specific period, the effect mode in the effect operation executed during variable display of decorative symbols is specified. It can be varied depending on whether it is within or outside the period. In addition, for example, an effect mode that varies depending on whether the time is within or outside the specific period is, for example, an effect image display operation mode on the display screen of the image display device 5, an audio output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, It may be a part or all of the rendering operation by the electrical component for rendering, such as a lighting operation mode such as the game effect lamp 9 or the decoration LED, or a motion mode of the rendering movable member. .

  Following the processing of step S520, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command (step S521). Then, for example, by supplying a display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern to the display control unit 123, the “left” and “middle” provided on the display screen of the image display device 5 are provided. The setting for starting the variation of the decorative symbols in the image display device 5 is performed such that the variation of the decorative symbols is started in each of the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (step S522). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation processing (step S523), and the decorative symbol variation setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation process executed in step S162 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation process shown in FIG. 60, the effect control CPU 120 first updates the effect control process timer value (for example, 1 subtraction, for example) (step S531), and then displays the updated effect control process timer value. Compared with the effect control process timer determination value indicated by the control pattern, it is determined whether or not any of the timer determination values is met (step S532). And if it does not correspond to any timer judgment value (step S532; No), the decorative symbol variation process is terminated.

  If the timer determination value is matched in step S532 (step S532; Yes), various control data (for example, display control data, sound control data, lamp control) stored in the effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value. Data or any one of the end codes is read (step S533). Here, when the plurality of timer determination values indicated by the effect control pattern in the process of step S532 match the effect control process timer value, a plurality of stored timer determination values are associated with each other. What is necessary is just to read control data by the process of step S533. Then, it is determined whether or not the control data read in step S533 is an end code (step S534). At this time, if it is determined that the code is not an end code (step S534; No), an effect control command process for performing a command or setting corresponding to the control data read in step S533 is executed (step S534). S535), the decorative pattern changing process is terminated. In the effect control command processing in step S535, for example, when the display control data is read in step S533, the display control command created according to the display control data is transmitted to the display control unit 123, and the voice control data is stored. When read, the command (sound effect signal) created according to the sound control data is transmitted to the sound control board 13 and when the lamp control data is read, the command created according to the lamp control data. (Electric decoration signal) may be transmitted to the lamp control board 14.

  If it is determined in step S534 that it is an end code (step S534; Yes), for example, by setting a predetermined timer initial value in the effect control process timer, the big hit start designation command reception waiting time is set. This is performed (step S536). Then, the value of the decorative symbol process flag is updated to “3”, which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation end process (step S537), and then the decorative symbol variation processing is terminated. When a decorative symbol stop command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, when it is determined in step S534 that it is an end code, “left”, “middle”, “right” ”In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, for example, temporarily stop display so as to display the fluctuation variation of the decorative symbol, and receive the decorative symbol stop command in the decorative symbol variation end process of step S163 shown in FIG. In response to this, the decorative design may be stopped completely.

  FIG. 61 shows whether or not the ratio of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is the reach state when the variable display result is “losing” is within the game state or the specific period of the pachinko gaming machine 1 An example of setting according to whether it is out of the period or the like is shown. In step S267 of FIG. 48, based on the determination result of whether it is within or outside the specific period in step S262, etc., according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. One of the reach determination tables 134A to 134E shown in FIG. And, when the gaming state is a special gaming state such as a probable change state or a short time state, the setting in the reach determination tables 134B to 134E, when it is within the period of the specific period, than when it is outside the period of the specific period In addition, the determination ratio that the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state is increased. Therefore, by increasing the appearance rate of the reach state within the specific period, it is possible to increase the expectation that the variable display result will be a “big hit” and to improve the interest of the game.

  FIG. 62 (A) shows the game pattern in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the period of the specific period with respect to the determination ratio of the variation pattern type when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”. An example of the setting according to whether it is or is out of the period is shown. In step S264 of FIG. 48, based on the determination result of whether it is within or outside the specific period in step S262, etc., according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. ), One of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132E shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B is selected as the use table. When the gaming state is a special gaming state such as a probability variation state or a short-time state, the setting in the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132B to 132E is outside the period of the specific period when it is within the period of the specific period. The determination ratio of the variation pattern type of the normal CA 3-1 including the variation pattern in which the “normal” reach effect is executed is higher than that at certain times. Therefore, within a specific period, when the “normal” reach effect is executed, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (reliability) is increased, so the “normal” reach effect is executed. Even in such a case, it is possible to increase the expectation that the variable display result will be a “big hit” and to improve the interest of the game.

  FIG. 62B shows a game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a period of a specific period with respect to the determination ratio of the variation pattern type at the time of reach lose where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”. An example of setting according to whether it is inside or outside the period is shown. In step S272 of FIG. 48, in accordance with the table selection setting shown in FIG. 14F based on the determination result of whether it is within or outside the specific period in step S262, FIG. One of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135E shown in FIG. When the gaming state is a special gaming state such as a probability variation state or a short-time state, the setting in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135B to 135E is outside the period of the specific period when it is within the period of the specific period. Compared to a certain time, the determination ratio of the variation pattern type of the normal CA 2-1 including the variation pattern in which the “normal” reach production is executed is lower, while the variation pattern in which the “super” reach production is executed. The determination ratio of the variation pattern type to be included increases. Therefore, by increasing the possibility (appearance rate) of “super” reach production within a specific period, the expectation that the variable display result will be “big hit” is increased, and the interest of the game is enhanced. Can be improved.

  The initial value set in the special game remaining number counter in steps 315 and S318 shown in FIG. 51 and the specific period judgment value compared with the special game remaining number count value in step 261 shown in FIG. When the gaming state in the gaming machine 1 is a probable change state, the variable display result can be changed by changing the appearance rate of the reach state, etc. according to the probability that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (the big hit probability during the probable change). Any predetermined value may be used so that the expectation of “big hit” can be surely increased. As an example, when the probability of jackpot during probability change is 1/100, the count initial value set in the special game remaining number counter for the probability variation state is “100”, and the special game remaining number count value is set in step S261. If the specific period judgment value to be compared is “10”, when there are 10 remaining special-games that can be executed in the probability variation state, the reach rate of the reach state is changed, so that the remaining 10 special games are changed. A variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to a figure game is likely to reach a reach state. Thus, the player can clearly recognize that the appearance rate of the reach state has been changed, and can surely increase the expectation that the variable display result will be “big hit”.

  Next, a specific example of the rendering operation by displaying various rendering images centering on the variable display of decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 will be described. The effect control board 12 responds to the reception of the first change start command and the second change start command transmitted from the main board 11 based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, for example, The control CPU 120 supplies a predetermined display control command to the display control unit 123 in the effect control command process of step S535 shown in FIG. In the middle and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of the decorative symbols is started.

  Hereinafter, a specific example in the case where the variable display result of the decorative design is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “losing” will be described. FIG. 63 shows the case where the specific effect is not executed among the cases where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”, or when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, the “slip” specific effect is executed. In this case, a display operation example in the case where a specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye” is executed is shown. For example, when the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effect as shown in FIGS. 63 (C1) and (C2) is not executed, and the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4. 63 is specified when the “slip” specific effect as shown in FIGS. 63E1 to 63E4 is executed, and when the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-5 is specified, FIG. 63D1 to FIG. When a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” as shown in (D6) is executed, and a variation pattern of non-reach PA1-7 is designated, “expansion chance” as shown in FIGS. 63 (F1) to (F6) This is a case where a specific effect of “eye end” is executed. In FIG. 63 (A), for example, the decorative symbols are displayed in all of the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” in response to the start of variation of special symbols in the special symbol game. The fluctuation starts. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 63B, the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L.

  When the specific effect is not executed or when the “slip” specific effect is executed, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 22A in step S505 shown in FIG. Corresponding to the determination of the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” as the final stopped symbol FZ1-1, the decorative symbol stop display as shown in FIG. 63B is performed. If the decorative pattern variable display mode is “non-reach” and the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed, the slip pattern is always as shown in FIG. Since the specific effect of “slip” is executed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, which is determined only for the slip TP1-1, the “slip” specific effect is executed at high speed. Therefore, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L is executed. The decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed are not changed depending on the specific effect of “slip”. Further, when the specific effect of “end of development chance” is executed, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 22D in step S504 shown in FIG. Corresponding to the combination of the decorative symbols constituting HC6 determined as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, FZ1-6, the decorative symbol stop display as shown in FIG. Will be done. When the “pseudo-ream” specific effect is executed, for example, the decorative design indicating the number “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 in the process of step S505 shown in FIG. Based on the stop symbol FZ1-1, referring to the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 169A shown in FIG. 32A in step S712 shown in FIG. 57, the combination of the decorative symbols constituting the pseudo consecutive chance eye GC6 is determined. Corresponding to the determination as the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3, the decorative symbol stop display as shown in FIG. 63 (B) is performed.

  Thereafter, when the specific effect is not executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 63 (C1), the decorative symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. ) And then stop display (temporary stop display) of the decorative symbol indicating the number “4” in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C as shown in FIG. 63 (C2), and then the non-reach combination is obtained. The confirmed decorative symbol is stopped (final stop). At this time, the final decorative symbol shown in FIG. 22B is displayed in step S505 shown in FIG. 55 as the final decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R or the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. By referring to the determination table 160B, or by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 22C together with the left / right outcome determination table 161 shown in FIG. 23, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 and the middle final stop It is determined as symbol FZ1-3.

  On the other hand, when the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, as an example, the number “7” is shown in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R as shown in FIG. 63 (D1). After the decorative symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped), the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C as shown in FIG. 63 (D2). ), The decorative symbol that becomes the pseudo-continuous chance GC6 is stopped and displayed. At this time, for example, temporary stop display such as decorative fluctuation display may be performed, and then the decorative symbols may be changed again in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as shown in FIG. 63 (D3). . Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 63 (D4) to (D6), decorative symbols indicating the numbers “6”, “7”, and “4” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. Are sequentially displayed in a stop (temporary stop display), and then the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped (final stop display).

  When the specific effect of “slip” is executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 63 (E1), the decorative symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R ( After the temporary stop display), as shown in FIG. 63 (E2), the decorative symbol is re-varied at high speed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63 (E3), the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is changed so that the decorative symbol indicating the number “7” is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. Here, as shown in FIG. 63 (E1), the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R is, for example, the right final stop symbol FZ1- determined in step S505 shown in FIG. 2 is determined by referring to the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 168A shown in FIG. 31A in step S705 shown in FIG. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (E4), after the decorative symbol indicating the number “4” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C, the non-reach combination is confirmed. The decorative design is stopped (final stop display).

  In the case where a specific effect of “end of development opportunity” is executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 63 (F1), a decorative pattern indicating the number “7” is displayed in the “right” decorative pattern display area 5R. After the stop display (temporary stop display), as shown in FIG. 63 (F2), the decorative symbol indicating the numeral “7” is also stopped (temporary stop display) in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C. As a result, the decorative symbols constituting the development opportunity eye HC6 are temporarily displayed. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (F3), an effect display is performed such that the temporarily stopped decorative design rotates in a certain direction, and then, as shown in FIG. 63 (F4), the decorative design is displayed. An effect display is performed so that the player can expect that the variable display state becomes a reach state. Here, if the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped from the effect display as shown in FIG. 63 (F4) is rotated in the reverse direction, the development of the reach state occurs. In this example, the development that reaches the reach state does not occur, and, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (F5), after the effect display is performed so that the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols in the rotation state is restored. The confirmed decorative symbols constituting the development chance eye HC6 are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  FIG. 64 shows a display operation example when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed among the cases in which the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. For example, when the non-reach PA1-6 fluctuation pattern is designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, the main notice pattern determined in step S709 shown in FIG. 57 corresponds to the main notice TP2-1. Based on the fact that the symbol variation control pattern of the non-reach CPA 1-6-1 stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 39 is selected and determined as the use pattern in step S520 shown in FIG. A specific effect of “main notice” as shown is executed. In FIG. 64 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of special symbols in the special symbol game, the decorative symbols are displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The fluctuation starts. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 64B, the decorative symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the “right” decorative symbol is displayed. In the area 5R, the decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is stopped (temporarily stopped), and a character image CH1 with pompoms is displayed at a display position corresponding to the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. Is done. Note that the character image CH1 appears as an effect image in the reach effect α1 to reach effect α3 that are executed when the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state.

  Subsequently, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), after the effect display is performed to update the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. For example, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), in accordance with the change of the character image CH1, in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, the update display to the decorative symbol indicating the number “4” is “right”. In the decorative symbol display area 5R, the updated display of the decorative symbol indicating the number “3” is performed. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), after the effect display that further updates the decorative symbols updated and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R is performed, For example, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), in accordance with the change of the character image CH1, in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, the update display to the decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is changed to the “right” decorative symbol. In the symbol display area 5R, an update display to the decorative symbol indicating the number “1” is performed. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (G), the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are updated in accordance with the change of the character image CH1. For example, as shown in FIGS. 64 (H) to 64 (K), in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, decorative symbols indicating numbers “1” to “3” are updated and displayed in a predetermined order. Thereafter, in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (L), an effect display that updates the decorative symbol is performed, and then “3” as shown in FIG. 64 (M). A decorative symbol indicating the number is temporarily stopped and displayed. When the specific effect of “main notice” is completed in this way, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (N), after the character image CH1 is erased, the fixed decorative pattern that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display). .

  FIG. 65 shows a display operation example when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed among the cases where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”. For example, the variation pattern designation command is used to change the variation pattern of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-7, Super PB3-3, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-7, Super PA5-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3. When any one is designated, the symbol variation shown in FIG. 39 in step S520 shown in FIG. 55 corresponds to the main notice pattern determined in step S709 shown in FIG. 57 being the main notice TP2-1. Based on the selection of the symbol variation control pattern stored in the control pattern table 180 and the determination of the usage pattern, a specific effect of “main notice” as shown in FIG. 65 is executed. In the display operation example shown in FIG. 65, the same effect display as in FIGS. 64A to 64L is performed in the portions of FIGS. Thereafter, in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (M), the decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is temporarily stopped and displayed, so that the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L is displayed. The variable display state becomes the reach state together with the decorative symbols that are temporarily displayed at. When the specific effect of “main notice” is thus completed, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (N), after the character image CH1 is erased, a reach effect corresponding to the change of the variable display state to the reach state is started. After that, a confirmed decorative pattern that becomes a reach combination, a finalized decorative pattern that becomes a jackpot combination, and the like are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  66 to 68 show display operation examples when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise”. In FIG. 66 (A), for example, the decorative symbols are displayed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” in response to the start of variation of special symbols in the special symbol game. The fluctuation starts. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L.

  When a specific effect of “slip” is executed, for example, when the variation pattern is Super PA4-2, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (C1) to (C3), “ After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, changing the decorative symbols again in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, and then stopping and displaying them. The effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed so that the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. Moreover, when the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, for example, when the variation pattern is Super PA 4-4, as shown in FIGS. 66 (D1) to (D5), After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, an effect display that causes the decorative symbols to change again (pseudo continuous variation) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is displayed. Done. Thereafter, the decorative symbols indicating the number “6” are aligned and stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. It reaches the reach state. Further, for example, when a specific effect of “Development Chance” is executed, such as when the variation pattern is Super PC 4-1, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (E1) to (E6). In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol combination that will be the development chance HC6 is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), and then the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped is rotated in the direction of reversing. After such an effect display is performed, the decorative display variable display state becomes the reach state. In addition, when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed, for example, when the variation pattern is Super PA4-3, as shown in FIGS. 65B to 65M as an example After the effect display is performed, the decorative symbol variable display state may be the reach state as shown in FIG.

  After reaching the reach state as shown in FIG. 66 (C3) or 66 (D5) or after reaching the reach state as shown in FIG. 65 (N), for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the decorative symbol variation speed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C decreases. For example, when the variation pattern is any one of normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, “6” is displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C as shown in FIG. 67 (B). A “normal” reach effect that is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) together with the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R having the numbers “left” and “right” is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 67 (B), the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, but the variable display result is “lost”. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (H), after displaying the effect image indicating that the numeral indicating “5” is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C having “medium”, “medium” is displayed. The decorative symbols other than the number indicating “6” are stopped and displayed in the “decorative” decorative symbol display area 5C, such as the decorative symbol displaying the number “5” is stopped in the decorative symbol display area 5C. Thus, the confirmed decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed, and the variable display of decorative symbols may be terminated. When any one of reach production α1 to reach production α3, reach production β1 and reach production β2 is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. The fluctuating speed of the decorative pattern at is increased again, and various reach effects are displayed.

  For example, in the reach effect β1, after the character image CH2 as shown in FIG. 67 (D) is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds. Further, in the case of any one of the reach effect α1 to the reach effect α3, after the character image CH1 as shown in FIG. 67 (E) is displayed, the reach effect display as shown in FIG. 67 (F) proceeds. To do. In the reach effect α1, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (G), a decorative design that is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the first stage effect display appears. In the example shown in FIG. 67 (G), the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed in correspondence with the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, but the variable display result is “lost”. In such a case, the fixed decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed, and the variable display of decorative symbols may be terminated. On the other hand, in the reach effect α2 and the reach effect α3, for example, as shown in FIGS. 67 (H) and (I), the process proceeds to the second stage effect display. On the other hand, in reach effect β2, after a character image CH3 as shown in FIG. 67 (J) is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds.

  When the second stage effect display progresses as shown in FIG. 67 (I), if the reach effect α2 is reached, for example, as shown in FIG. A decorative pattern to be displayed appears. When the variable display result is “losing”, for example, as shown in FIG. 68B, the displayed decorative symbols are not changed, and the fixed decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination are stopped and displayed. What is necessary is just to finish the variable display of a decoration design. On the other hand, in the reach effect α3, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68B to 68D, the process proceeds to the third stage effect display (also referred to as “relief effect”). Then, a decorative pattern that is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the third stage of effect display appears. Here, for example, if it is decided not to execute the changing promotion effect in step S724 shown in FIG. 58, the temporarily stopped display decoration pattern is used as it is as the final stop design as shown in FIG. 68 (E). Stopped display (final stop display) as a confirmed decorative pattern. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the fluctuating promotion effect, after temporarily displaying the decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination as shown in FIG. As shown in Fig. 5, the same pattern is changed again in the state where the same decorative symbols are aligned in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, when the changing promotion effect is executed in response to the big hit type being “first probability change”, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (H), the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped is changed again. After that, the promotion success effect during change is performed to stop and display the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the probability variation big hit combination. If the promotion promotion effect during change is executed, after performing the re-change of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 68 (G), for example, as in FIG. What is necessary is just to stop-display a decorative design.

  FIG. 69 shows an example of a display operation when the notice display effect of “mail display” is executed. In this display operation example, first, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of special symbols in a special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas are displayed. As shown in FIG. 69 (B), the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed at 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Start fluctuation. Thereafter, for example, the information is read from the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 decided in step S520 shown in FIG. 55 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2 decided in step S746 shown in FIG. According to the effect display control data and the like, for example, as shown in FIG. 69C, an effect image YH1 that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 is displayed. Then, when the player operates the operation button 30 within a predetermined period, and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 to the effect control board 12 is turned on accordingly, for example, the effect control CPU 120 By switching the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 to the notice CYP3-2-2, the effect image YH2 indicating the mail message as shown in FIG. Change the direction. On the other hand, when the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period, the effect image YH1 is deleted as shown in FIG. 69 (E), for example, without switching the notice effect control pattern, The notice effect ends. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (F), the decorative symbol variable display proceeds, such as temporarily displaying the decorative symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L.

  FIG. 70 shows an example of a display operation when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. In FIG. 70 (A), for example, the decorative symbols are displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in response to, for example, the start of special symbol variation in the special symbol game. The fluctuation starts. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 70 (B) to (D), decorative symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “5”, and “3” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. Are sequentially displayed in a stop (temporary stop display), and then the confirmed decorative symbol that becomes the chance of chance TC1 is stopped (final stop display). At this time, as the big hit effect in the two round big hit state, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (E), an effect image for notifying the transition to a special effect mode such as the LIVE mode is displayed. As an ending effect in response to the end of the two round big hit state, for example, an effect image as shown in FIG. 70 (F) is displayed, and the display enabling the recognition of the LIVE mode is shown in FIG. 70, for example. As shown in (G), the display is kept displayed even after the next decorative pattern change is started.

  In the above configuration example and execution example of various processes, when the variable display result is “losing”, the occurrence rate of the reach state is specified to be higher within the specific period than outside the specific period. Depending on whether the period is within or outside of the period, the determination ratio of changing the decorative symbol variable display state to the reach state is varied. On the other hand, you may make it reduce the appearance rate of a reach state within the period of a specific period rather than the period of a specific period.

  As an example, instead of the reach determination table 134C shown in FIG. 13C, a reach determination table 134C shown in FIG. 71A is prepared, and instead of the reach determination table 134E shown in FIG. A reach determination table 134E shown in 71 (B) is prepared. When the gaming state is a probable change state, the figure is used when the gaming state is within the period of the specific period as compared with the reach determination table 134B shown in FIG. 13B used when the gaming state is outside the period of the specific period. In the reach determination table 134C shown in 71 (A), the determination value assigned to the determination result of the reach HB2-1 corresponding to setting the decorative symbol variable display state to the reach state is reduced. Further, when the gaming state is a short-time state, it is used when the gaming state is within the period of the specific period as compared with the reach determination table 134E shown in FIG. In the reach determination table 134E shown in FIG. 71B, the determination value assigned to the determination result of the reach HC2-1 corresponding to setting the variable display state of the decorative symbols to the reach state is reduced. With this setting, when the variable display result is “lost”, the decision to change the decorative symbol variable display state to the reach state when the variable display result is “losing” when it is within the specific period and when it is outside the specific period. The rate is low. Therefore, there is a high possibility (reliability) that the variable display result will be “big hit” when the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state.

  Even in this case, when the gaming state is a special gaming state such as a probabilistic state or a short-time state, the determination ratio indicating the reach state is different depending on whether the gaming state is within or outside the specific period. Can be made. That is, based on the number of executions of the special figure game in the special game state, whether to change the decorative symbol variable display state to the reach state according to the determination result of whether or not the predetermined condition of being within the specific period is satisfied It is possible to vary the decision ratio of whether or not. In addition, when it is within the specified period, the variable display result may be “big hit” when the decorative display variable display state reaches the reach state compared to when it is outside the specified period (reliability) The degree of expectation that the variable display result will be a “big hit” when the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state within the specified period is improved, and the fun of the game is improved. be able to.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination tables 134A to 134E are set, and in particular, the reach determination tables 134B to 134E used when the game state is a special game state such as a probability change state or a short time state. Depending on whether it is within the period of the specific period or outside the period, the ratio of the decorative pattern variable display mode to reach state is varied. That is, based on the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state, the determination ratio of whether or not the decorative symbol variable display mode is in the reach state is different depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is within a specific period. Make it. As a result, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” in the special game state can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 determines the variation pattern type using one of the variation pattern type determination tables shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, 14, and 15 in the process of step S <b> 275 shown in FIG. 48. After that, based on the variation pattern type and the like, the variation pattern is determined using one of the variation pattern determination tables illustrated in FIGS. 16 to 19 in the process of step S278 illustrated in FIG. Thereby, when adding the variation pattern type or changing the occurrence rate, it is only necessary to change the setting of the determined value in the variation pattern type determination table, so that the setting time can be shortened. In addition, when adding a detailed variation pattern or changing the occurrence rate, it is only necessary to change the setting of the determination value in the variation pattern determination table, so that the setting time can be shortened. That is, since the determination ratio of the variation pattern type and the determination ratio of the variation pattern can be set separately, the design change related to the variation pattern type and the distribution of the variation pattern can be easily performed.

  When the reach determination tables 134A to 134E shown in FIGS. 13A to 13E are used, when the special game state such as the probability variation state or the short time state is within the specific period, it is outside the specific period. Compared to a certain time, the ratio that the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state becomes high. That is, based on the number of executions of the special game in the special game state, when the predetermined condition of being within the period of the specific period is satisfied, the decorative pattern variable display mode is changed compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. The determination ratio to reach the reach state becomes high. In this way, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the special gaming state, the appearance rate of the reach state is increased, thereby increasing the expectation that the variable display result will be “big hit” in the special gaming state and improving the interest of the game. be able to.

  The reach determination table 134C shown in FIG. 71A is used in place of the reach determination table 134C shown in FIG. 13C, and the reach determination table 134E shown in FIG. When the reach determination table 134E is used, in a special game state such as a probability change state or a short time state, the variable display state of the decorative symbols is more when the period is within the specific period than when the period is outside the specific period. The ratio of reaching reach is reduced. That is, based on the number of executions of the special game in the special game state, when the predetermined condition of being within the period of the specific period is satisfied, the decorative pattern variable display mode is changed compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. The determination ratio of reaching the reach state is lowered. In this way, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the special gaming state, the appearance rate of the reach state is lowered, while in the reach state, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” is enhanced, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. Can be improved.

  Due to the settings of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135E, particularly the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135B to 135E used when the gaming state is a special gaming state such as a probability variation state or a short time state, Depending on whether or not the period is out of the period, the ratio determined for the variation pattern type in which the “normal” reach effect is executed or the change pattern type in which the “super” reach effect is executed is varied. That is, based on the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state, some or all of the “normal” or “super” reach effects depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is within a specific period. The ratio at which a specific reach production such as production is executed is varied. As a result, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” in the special game state can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Depending on whether the hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B are set or the loss fluctuation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B are set, it is “slip” or “pseudo-continuous”, for example, depending on whether it is within a specific period or outside the period. , The ratio of execution is different for some or all of the specific effects such as “Main notice”, “Development chance item”, and “Development opportunity item end”. In other words, based on the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state, the ratio executed for a part or all of the specific effect is varied depending on whether the predetermined condition is within the specific period. As a result, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” in the special game state can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the process of step S520 shown in FIG. 55, depending on whether it is within the period of the specific period or outside the period, for example, in the effect control pattern tables 185A and 185B shown in FIG. By changing what is read, the presentation mode in part or all of the presentation operation executed during variable display of the decorative design is made different depending on whether it is within or outside the specific period. That is, based on the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state, depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is within a specific period, the production mode is provided for some or all of the production operations related to variable display of decorative symbols, etc. Make them different. As a result, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” in the special game state can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, for example, by setting the sub-notice pattern determination table 172A shown in FIG. 36, the sub-notice effect is determined by varying the sub-notice pattern determination ratio depending on whether it is within the specific period or outside the specific period. Is executed, and the ratio of determination of the production mode in the sub-notice effect is varied depending on whether it is within the specific period or outside the specific period. That is, based on the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state, depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is within a specific period, the execution ratio of a predetermined effect operation that becomes a sub-notice effect or the effect in the sub-notice effect The ratio at which the aspect is any of a plurality of types is varied. As a result, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” in the special game state can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, in the above embodiment, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is normally a big hit symbol, and after the big hit gaming state based on the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol, the time is shortened. It was described as being controlled by the state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is “big hit”, it may be controlled only to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state is ended, and may not be controlled to the short time state. .

  In addition, the determination as to whether the game state is within or outside the specific period is executed when the gaming state is in a probabilistic state or when the gaming state is in one of the short-time states. , It may not be performed when the other gaming state. That is, when the gaming state is one of the probable change state and the short-time state, the ratio of reaching the reach state according to the success or failure of the predetermined condition based on the number of executions of the special-purpose game that is within the specific period On the other hand, in the case of the other game state, the ratio of reaching the reach state may not be changed regardless of the success or failure of the predetermined condition based on the number of executions of the special figure game.

  When the game state is a special game state such as a probability change state or a short time state, a predetermined condition based on the number of executions of the special figure game is satisfied, for example, the number of executions of the special figure game in the special game state has reached a predetermined number of times. At this time, a predetermined flag (for example, a specific period determination flag) provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 may be set to an on state. In this case, until the special gaming state is completed, the process of the steps S261 and S262 shown in FIG. 48 is not performed, for example, by maintaining the specific period determination flag in the on state. Can be specified. In the processes of steps S264, S267, and S272, etc., different determination tables may be selected depending on whether the specific period determination flag is on or off. Thereafter, when the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are cleared and turned off in step S285 shown in FIG. 49, or the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are cleared and turned off in steps S295 and S296 shown in FIG. Sometimes, the specific period determination flag may be cleared and turned off.

  In the above embodiment, after setting the probability variation flag and the short time flag to the ON state in steps S316 and S317 shown in FIG. 51 and setting the initial count value in the special game remaining number counter in step S318, FIG. In step S283, when the special game remaining number count value updated so as to be decremented by 1 is "0", both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are cleared in step S285, and the probability change state is ended. explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A special game that can be executed until the probability variation flag is cleared and turned off after both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are turned on in steps S316 and S317. The number of executions may be different from the number of executions of the special-purpose game that can be executed before the time-short flag is cleared and turned off. As an example, after a predetermined initial count value (for example, “70”) is set in the special game remaining number counter in step S318 shown in FIG. 51, the special game remaining number count obtained by subtracting 1 in step S283 shown in FIG. When the value reaches a predetermined short time end determination value (for example, “20”), the short time flag is cleared and turned off, while the probability variation flag is kept on. Thereafter, the special game remaining number count value is further subtracted in step S283 shown in FIG. 49, and the special game remaining number count value after the subtraction is changed to a probability variation end determination value (for example, “0”) different from the short-time end determination value. When it reaches, the probability variation flag may be cleared to be in an off state. If the count initial value set in the special game remaining number counter in step S318 is set to “70”, the short time end determination value is set to “20”, and the probability variation end determination value is set to “0”, after the big hit gaming state ends. After entering the certain change state, when the special display game is executed 50 times without the variable display result being “big hit”, the time reduction flag is cleared and the off state is turned off. The time-shortening control for shortening the variation time of the special symbol in the game ends. On the other hand, since the probability change flag is kept on until the special game is executed 70 times without the variable display result being “big hit” after the big hit game state is finished, the time reduction control is finished. The probability variation control may continue to be performed after the operation. When such control is performed, it is determined whether it is out of the specific period or out of the period, depending on whether both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are on or only the probability variation flag is on. You may do it. In other words, after the big hit gaming state is ended, after both the probability variation flag and the short time flag are turned on in steps S316 and S317, the special display game is executed 50 times without the variable display result being “big hit”. In the period, since both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are on, it is determined that the period is outside the specific period. On the other hand, after both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are turned on in steps S316 and S317, the special display game is executed 50 times without the variable display result being “big hit”, and further variable display is performed. In the period until the special figure game is executed 20 times (70 times from the end of the big hit gaming state) without the result being “big hit”, only the probability variation flag is on and the short time flag is off. It is determined that it is within a specific period. In this way, the success or failure of the predetermined condition based on the number of executions of the special-purpose game that is within the specific period may be specified from the state (on or off) of the probability variation flag or the short time flag. Note that the probability variation flag may be cleared before the time reduction flag after both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are turned on in steps S316 and S317. Alternatively, the short time flag is cleared when the special game remaining number count value reaches a predetermined value and is turned off, while the probability change flag is the next variable display result “big hit” regardless of the special game remaining number count value. It may be kept in an on state until

  In the second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. 8B, since the determined value is not assigned to the variable display result of “small hit”, the variable display is performed based on the establishment of the second start condition. The result is described as “small hit” and it is not determined that the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the second start condition is satisfied, the variable display result may be determined to be “small hit” and controlled to the small hit gaming state at a fixed determination rate. For example, if the first special symbol display result determination table 180A shown in FIG. 8A is used as a common determination table for the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, the second start condition Can be determined to control to the small hit gaming state at the same determination ratio as when the first start condition is satisfied. Further, when the second start condition is satisfied, the variable display result may be determined to be “small hit” at a lower determination ratio than when the first start condition is satisfied. The second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition is satisfied by the game ball entering the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6. Therefore, the second start condition is easily established when the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening in the special game state such as the probability variation state or the short time state. Therefore, when the second start condition is satisfied, the variable display result is “small hit” by reducing the determination ratio so that the variable display result becomes “small hit” in the special gaming state. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the winning action is executed, and to suppress the decline of the game entertainment due to the delay in the game in the special game state such as the probability change state or the short time state.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 9, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the determination value is not assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. In the case where the variable display result is set to “big hit” based on the establishment and the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state, it has been described that it is not determined that the big hit type is “surprise” and the control is set to the two round big hit state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the variable display result is set to “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the establishment of the second start condition, the big hit type is determined to be “surprise” at a fixed decision rate. You may be able to do that. In this case, in the jackpot type determination table 131, even when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the determination value may be assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value. Thereby, the table data in the jackpot type determination table 131 can be simplified, and the data capacity stored in the ROM 101 can be reduced. It should be noted that when the second start condition is satisfied, it may be determined to be the big hit type of “surprise” at a lower determination ratio than when the first start condition is satisfied. As a result, when the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening in a special game state such as a probability change state or a short-time state, the round hit type is determined to be “surprise” and almost no ball is obtained. The possibility of becoming a big hit state can be reduced, and a decrease in the game interest can be suppressed due to a delay in a game in a special game state such as a probability change state or a short time state.

  The specific period determination value that is compared with the special game remaining number count value in the process of step S261 shown in FIG. 48 indicates that the variable display result is repeatedly “big hit” before the special game state such as the probability change state or the short time state ends. You may make it change according to the frequency | count (what is called a "continuous-chan count"). As an example, when the number of consecutive chunks is “0” to “4”, the specific period determination value is “10”, while when the number of consecutive chunks is “5” to “9”, the specific period When the determination value is “5” and the number of consecutive chunks is “10” or more, the specific period determination value may be “3”.

  In the reach determination tables 134A to 134E, it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state at a determination ratio irrespective of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. In the above description, a determination value is assigned to each determination result. On the other hand, the determination ratio of whether to reach the reach state may be varied depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. For example, in the reach determination tables 134A to 134E, the allocation of the determination value for each determination result may be different depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. In addition, for some or all of the variation pattern type, variation pattern, slip pattern, main notice pattern, sub notice pattern, etc., the determination ratio is set according to whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. You may make it differ.

  In the above embodiment, based on the special game remaining number count value indicating the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the special game state, it is determined that the predetermined condition is successful within the period of the specific period. Accordingly, the ratio of reaching the reach, the ratio of executing the specific reach effect, the ratio of executing the specific effect, the ratio of executing the sub-notice effect, and the like have been described as different. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state matches a predetermined number of times (for example, “10”), or the final number that can be executed in the special gaming state. Based on the number of executions of the special game in the special game state, such as when the number of executions of the special game in the special game state matches a predetermined number of times, such as Depending on whether or not an arbitrary predetermined condition is satisfied, the ratio of reaching reach, the execution ratio of various effects, and the like may be varied.

  Depending on the success or failure of the predetermined conditions, the ratio of reaching reach, the ratio of executing a specific reach effect, the ratio of executing a specific effect, the ratio of executing a sub-notice effect, the effect operation by the electric parts for the effect All of the effects may be different, or only some of them may be different. Also, based on the success or failure of a predetermined condition based on the number of executions of the special game in the special gaming state, about a part or all of the variation pattern type, variation pattern, slip pattern, main notice pattern, sub notice pattern type, sub notice pattern, The determination ratio may be varied.

  In the above embodiment, after determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state in steps S270 and S271 shown in FIG. 48, the reach selected in step S272 or step S273 based on the determination result. It has been described that the variation pattern type is determined in steps S274 and S275 using the variation pattern type determination table or the non-reach variation pattern type determination table. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reach determination tables 134A to 134E shown in FIGS. 13A to 13E and the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135E shown in FIGS. 135E and the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C, for example, by using a determination table, etc. The change pattern type may be determined together with the determination as to whether or not the symbol variable display state is set to the reach state.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B has been described, but the present invention is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine provided with one special symbol display device. Can be applied.

  The presence / absence of the promotion effect during change, the determination of the slip pattern and the main notice pattern may be determined by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 or the like. In this case, a variation pattern designation command for designating the presence / absence of the promotion effect during variation determined on the main board 11 side, the slip pattern, the main notice pattern, and the like together with the variation pattern may be prepared. Alternatively, separately from the change pattern designation command, an effect control command for specifying the presence / absence of a change promotion effect, a slip pattern, a main notice pattern, and the like may be prepared.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the final stop symbol in steps S504 to S506 shown in FIG. 55, steps S510, S515, and S516 shown in FIG. Various effect operations are performed by executing the specific effect setting process in step S517 shown in FIG. 55, executing the changing promotion effect setting process in step S518, executing the sub-notice setting process in step S519, and the like. It was described as determining the control content. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the control contents of various rendering operations are shared and determined by a plurality of CPUs mounted on a plurality of control boards provided to control the rendering operations. It may be.

  As an example, a display control board 16 as shown in FIG. 72 is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5. On the display control board 16, a display control CPU 140, a ROM 141, a RAM 142, a random number circuit 143, and an I / O 144 are mounted. In this case, since the display control CPU 140 mounted on the display control board 16 executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, it is mounted on the effect control board 12 in the above embodiment. The displayed control unit 123 may not be provided. In the display control board 16, for example, the display control CPU 140 executes a program read from the ROM 141, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by displaying the effect image in the image display device 5. At this time, the display control CPU 140 reads fixed data from the ROM 141, the display control CPU 140 writes various variation data to the RAM 142 and temporarily stores them, and the display control CPU 140 stores the RAM 142 in the RAM 142. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading various variation data temporarily stored, display operation CPU 140 receiving operation for receiving input of various signals from outside of display control board 16 via I / O 144, display control CPU 140 I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the display control board 16 via O144 is also performed.

  In this case, the display control CPU 140, for example, based on the display control command from the effect control board 12 or the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the effect control board 12, etc., the sub-notice of step S519 shown in FIG. By executing the setting process, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform an effect operation as a sub-notice effect during variable display of a decorative design, and to perform any of the effect operations as a sub-notice effect as a sub-notice pattern. You may make it determine whether to do. Alternatively, the display control CPU 140 performs the processing of steps S504 to S506 shown in FIG. 55, the processing of steps S510, S515, and S516 shown in FIG. 56, the processing of steps S705, S712, and S714 shown in FIG. By executing at least a part of the processing in step S726, all or all of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R or A part may be determined. The display control CPU 140 may execute any part of the processes executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above embodiment. The sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 may be connected to the effect control board 12 by wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal and an electrical decoration signal from the effect control board 12. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, a process for comprehensively controlling the effect operation may be executed by the effect control CPU 120.

  Further, the functions of the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are provided in the voice control circuit and the lamp control circuit mounted on the effect control board 12 so that independent control to be the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 is performed. The substrate may not be provided. In this case, a display control board 16 as shown in FIG. 72 is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5, and the effect control pattern determined in step S520 of FIG. A display control command corresponding to the display control board 12 may be transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the display control board. In the configuration shown in FIG. 2, any one of the processes executed by the production control CPU 120 in the above embodiment by the microcomputer mounted on the sound control board 13 or the microcomputer mounted on the lamp control board 14 is selected. May be executed. Thus, when a plurality of control boards are provided to control the rendering operation, the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the control of the audio output operation in the speakers 8L and 8R. The process for determining the control content of various effect operations, such as the process for determining the content and the process for determining the control content of the lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 is performed on any control board. The combination to be executed may be any combination.

  In the above-described embodiment, the small hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, and the game state is not changed after the small hit game state ends. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state based on the fact that the big hit type becomes “surprise”, and after the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the positive change state. Explained as being. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the case where the big hit type is “accurate” or the variable display result is “small hit”, A case of “suddenly normal” may be provided. As an example, “suddenly short time” and “suddenly normal” are included in the jackpot type when the variable display result is “big jackpot”. In this case, the jackpot type determination table 131 includes table data that assigns the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type to the “suddenly short” or “sudden normal” jackpot types in accordance with the variable special figure designation buffer value. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that it may be. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly short”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the big hit type is “accuracy”, it is controlled to the short time state. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “suddenly normal”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as when the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the jackpot type is “surprise”, the normal state is controlled. Thereby, a player's expectation with respect to the gaming state controlled after the end of the two round big hit state can be enhanced, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  When such “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” are provided, a variation pattern type and variation pattern different from those other than “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” may be determined. As a result, although the big hit type is “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal”, the same effect operation as in the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state is performed despite being controlled to the 2 round big hit state. It can prevent the player from feeling distrust. In addition, when the big hit type is "Suddenly short" or "Suddenly normal", when the variable display result is "Small hit", or when the big hit type is "Sudden", the common variation pattern type It may be possible to make a decision. As a result, when determining the fluctuation pattern, the big hit type is “Suddenly short” or “Suddenly normal”, or the variable display result is “Small hit” or the big hit type is “Abrupt”. Regardless of whether this is the case, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the game state such as the probability change state or the time-short state can be controlled after the big hit gaming state based on the variable display result being “big hit”. In the probability variation state and the short-time state, it is described that the control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of the game ball entering the second start winning opening and easily establishing the second start condition. . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the probability variation state, the probability variation control is continuously performed, and the advantageous release control that increases the possibility that the game ball enters the second start winning opening is performed. The high base state and the high probability low base state in which the probability variation control is performed but the advantageous release control is not performed may be included. Also, in the short-time state, a low-accuracy base state where the special figure fluctuation time is shortened and advantageous opening control is performed, and a low-accuracy low-base state where the special figure fluctuation time is shortened but advantageous opening control is not performed. May be included. As an example, depending on whether the big hit type is "probability change" or "surprise", after the big hit gaming state is finished, it is controlled to either the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state. May be. As another example, depending on whether the big hit type is “probability change” or “surprise”, the ratio that is controlled to either the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state ends , They may be different from each other. A special game, such as whether the game state is within or outside a specific period in some or all of a plurality of game states such as a low probability high base state, a high probability high base state, and a high probability low base state. The ratio of reaching the reach state may be varied according to the success or failure of the predetermined condition based on the number of executions.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in advance a computer It is possible to adopt a form distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows various chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of the small hit variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a reach determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a reach variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a non-reach fluctuation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a left-right output determination table. It is a figure which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a promotion production | presentation determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the temporary stop symbol determination table at the time of a promotion effect. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a slip pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the main notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the temporary stop symbol determination table at the time of a slide. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a pseudo | simulation continuous temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation variation. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the temporary stop symbol determination table at the time of an expansion chance. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a sub notice pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a sub notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a sub notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a sub notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a design fluctuation control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notification effect control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of various effect control pattern tables. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern table. FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a specific production | presentation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a change promotion effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a figure which illustrates the determination ratio of a reach state. It is a figure which illustrates the determination rate of a variation pattern classification. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the modification of a reach determination table. It is a figure which shows modifications, such as various control boards.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start-up switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Operation button 31 ... Operation detection switch 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (6)

A variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified based on the start condition being satisfied, and when the variable display result of the identification information is a predetermined specific display result A gaming machine that controls a specific gaming state advantageous to the player,
Pre-decision means for deciding whether or not to control to the specific gaming state before the variable display result of the identification information is derived and displayed;
Special gaming state control means for controlling the special gaming state more easily than the normal gaming state until the variable display count of the identification information reaches a predetermined number after the specific gaming state ends;
Reach determining means for determining whether or not to change the variable display state of the identification information to a reach state based on the determination that the prior determination means does not control the specific gaming state;
Predetermined condition determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition based on the variable display count of the identification information in the special gaming state is satisfied;
Reach for selecting reach determination data used for determination by the reach determination unit from a plurality of types of reach determination data having different determination ratios for setting the reach state according to the determination result by the predetermined condition determination unit Data selection means for determination ,
The pre-determining means determines whether to control to the specific gaming state at a common rate regardless of the number of variable display times of the identification information in the special gaming state.
A gaming machine characterized by that. When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the reach determination data selection means has a higher determination ratio indicating that the reach state is set than when it is determined that the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Select the reach determination data set in
The gaming machine according to claim 1. When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the reach determination data selection unit has a lower determination ratio indicating that the reach state is set than when it is determined that the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Select the reach determination data set in
The gaming machine according to claim 1. Production execution means for executing a predetermined production;
Wherein a different decision ratio according to the determination result by the predetermined condition determining means, and a certain reach demonstration determination means for determining whether to execute a specific reach demonstration,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, 2, or 3. Production execution means for executing a predetermined production;
Wherein a different decision proportions according to according to the determination result given condition determining means, and a particular effect determination means for determining whether to perform a different specific effect and reach demonstration,
The gaming machine according to claim 1 , 2 or 3 . The effect execution means changes the effect operation related to the variable display of the identification information according to the determination result by the predetermined condition determination means.
The gaming machine according to claim 4 or 5 , characterized in that.

Images